AMX Modero NXT 1200V User Manual

Operation/Reference Guide  
®
Modero 1200V  
G4 Touch Panels  
NXD-1200V and NXT-1200V  
12” Modero Video Touch Panels  
Touch Panels  
Last Revised: 10/1/2008  
FCC Information  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device  
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received; including interference  
that may cause undesired operation.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)  
Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of  
the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential  
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement  
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This  
equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment  
should be installed an operated with a minimum distance of 20 centimeters between the radiator and your body.  
Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
i
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Table of Contents  
ii  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Table of Contents  
iii  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Table of Contents  
iv  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Table of Contents  
vi  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Introduction  
Introduction  
AMX has taken a great leap forward with the release of their new 1200V-Series of Modero touch panels.  
These panels offer the ability to display Composite video, 802.11g communication, and USB support for  
extended input devices, and panel programming via a mini-USB port. The new G4 graphics and Video  
technology is supported by the release of the latest TPDesign4 Touch Panel Design Program. These  
video-capable panels support several video formats: NTSC, SECAM, and PAL (Color Active (CA)  
panels don’t support video).  
Each 1200V-Series panels have been pre-installed with 2 antennas which can be later used to  
configure each panel type for wireless communication (via an optional NXA-80211G wireless  
mini-PCI card).  
Modero Video Touch Panels (1200V-Series)  
The new and enhanced line of 12" Modero Touch Panel (NXT/NXD-1200V) represent the next step in  
video-capable panels and departs from the previously popular CA version. In addition to  
Composite/S-Video support (does not support Component RGB signals), the new 1200V panels feature  
dual USB connectivity for mouse and keyboard, and antennas, the use of a mini-USB port for panel  
programming and a complete departure from the use of an ICSNet connector for communication. These  
panels include a built-in microphone, left/right speakers, audio/headphone connector, and an included  
audio/video breakout box.  
Table Top models use AMX’s exclusive SmoothTilt® technology for effortless adjustment of the  
viewing angle.  
Each panel is sold only as part of a 1200V Kit which includes both a panel and an  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Audio/Video Breakout Box (FG2254-10). This box facilitates the installation  
and distribution of video, data, and audio to Modero touch panels located up to 200 feet (60.96 m) from  
the breakout box. These panels are ideally suited for displaying full motion video and audio with overlay  
graphics for applications with demanding visual requirements. The following is a listing of the currently  
available 1200V panels:  
1200-V Modero Video Touch Panels  
NXD-1200V  
12" Modero Video WallMount Touch Panel Kit  
(FG2251-60K)  
(includes both an NXD panel and an NXA-AVB/ETHERNET A/V Breakout Box).  
NXT-1200V  
12" Modero Video Table Top Touch Panel Kit  
(FG2250-60K)  
(includes both an NXD panel and an NXA-AVB/ETHERNET A/V Breakout Box).  
Sample  
NXT-1200V  
(front view)  
Sample  
NXD-1200V  
(front view)  
FIG. 1 Sample 1200V Video Touch Panels (front views)  
1
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Introduction  
Product Specifications (NXD-1200V and NXT-1200V)  
The following table outlines the specifications for 1200V-Series of 12" Modero panels.  
1200V Panel Specifications  
Dimensions (HWD):  
• NXD-1200V (with faceplate): 12.38" x 12.59" x 3.25"  
(31.43 cm x 31.97 cm x 8.25 cm)  
• NXT-1200V (Fully raised): 10.91" x 12.34" x 12.50"  
(27.70 cm x 31.33 cm x 31.75 cm)  
• NXT-1200V (Fully lowered): 6.77" x 12.34" x 12.50"  
(17.20 cm x 31.33 cm x 31.75 cm)  
• CB-TP12 (conduit/wallbox): 11.52" x 11.60" x 3.50"  
(29.27 cm x 29.47 cm x 8.89 cm)  
• MB-TP12 (VESA mounting box): 12.37" x 12.58" x 3.52"  
(31.42 cm x 31.95 cm x 8.94 cm)  
Power Requirements:  
Memory (factory default):  
Weight:  
• Constant current draw: 2.1 A @ 12 VDC (stand-alone)  
• Startup current draw: 3.2 A @ 12 VDC (stand-alone)  
• 256 MB on-board memory  
• 128 MB Compact Flash (upgradeable to 1 GB factory programmed)  
• NXD-1200V: 10.80 lbs (4.90 kg)  
• NXT-1200V: 10.80 lbs (4.90 kg)  
Panel LCD Parameters:  
• Aspect Ratio: 4 x 3  
2
• Brightness (luminance): 250 cd/m  
• Channel transparency: 8-bit Alpha channel transparency  
• Contrast ratio: 300:1  
• Display area (HW): 183.10 mm x 247.40 mm  
• Display colors: 256K (18-bit color depth)  
• Dot/Pixel pitch: 0.297 mm  
• Screen resolution (HV): 800 x 600 pixels  
• Video formats: NTSC, PAL, and SECAM (shown within variable-size  
video windows)  
Active Screen Area:  
Viewing Angles:  
Features:  
• 9.68” x 7.26” (24.60cm x 18.45cm)  
• Vertical: + 80° (up from center) and - 80° (down from center)  
• Enhanced hardware security (via an externally mounted Kensington  
Lock system)  
• Ethernet connectivity (replaced ICSNet as a method of communication)  
• New and improved connector compartment  
• Pre-installed 802.11g wireless card and integrated antennas (NXT  
models only)  
• Wired Ethernet @10/100 and Wireless Ethernet 802.11g  
• USB mouse/keyboard/programming ports  
• Support of the latest G4 applications: G4 Computer Control, G4Web  
®
Control , Dynamo, TakeNote™, and PictureFrame™.  
Supported Audio Sample Rates: • 48000Hz, 44100Hz, 32000Hz, 24000Hz, 22050Hz, 16000Hz, 12000Hz,  
11025Hz, and 8000Hz.  
Certifications:  
• FCC Part 15 Class B, CE, and EN 60950  
2
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Introduction  
1200V Panel Specifications (Cont.)  
Button Assignments:  
Button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels.  
• Button channel range: 1 - 4000 button push and Feedback (per address  
port)  
• Button variable text range: 1 - 4000 (per address port)  
• Button states range: 1 - 256 (General Button; 1 = Off State, 2 = On State)  
• Level range: 1 - 600 (default level value 0-255, can be set up to 1-65535)  
• Address port range: 1 - 100  
Front Panel Components:  
Light sensor:  
• Photosensitive light detector for automatic adjustment of the panel  
brightness (a dim room results in a dimmer LCD display and a bright  
room results in a brighter LCD display).  
Note: The light sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup Page section  
Motion sensor (PIR):  
• Proximity Infrared Detector to wake the panel when the panel is  
approached.  
• Activation range: + 20° vertically from center and + 45° horizontally  
from center.  
Note: The motion sensor can be adjusted via the Sensor Setup page  
Front setup access button:  
Microphone:  
• Provides both access to the Setup and Calibration pages and toggles the  
panel between a "sleep" and "wake" state.  
- When wired, "sleep" status means the backlight is Off.  
- When battery operated, wireless "sleep" status means the touch panel  
base is either Off or "suspended".  
• Used for intercom applications  
(requires an NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box for analog  
communication).  
Speakers:  
• Stereo output with a frequency response of 450 Hz - 7 KHz  
Rear Panel Components:  
Audio/Video connector:  
(Side panel location on NXD-Wall Mount panels)  
• RJ-45 connector for communication of differential audio/video signals  
to/from the touch panel (panel type dependant). This connector receives  
Composite video, Stereo (left/right) audio, and microphone audio.  
• Video is received via the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box.  
Configuring video windows for playback is done using TPDesign4.  
• In-bound audio (from the breakout box) gets directed to the speakers.  
• Out-bound audio is sent from the on-board microphone (on the  
front-panel). Selecting audio files for playback is configured through  
TPDesign4.  
Ethernet 10/100 port:  
Ethernet 10/100 LEDs:  
• RJ-45 port for 10/100 Mbps communication. The Ethernet port  
automatically negotiates the connection speed (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps),  
and whether to use half duplex or full duplex mode.  
®
• These panels communicate with the NetLinx Master using the ICSP  
protocol over Ethernet.  
• LEDs show communication activity and connection information:  
A-activity - Yellow LED lights when receiving or transmitting Ethernet  
data packets.  
L-link - Green LED lights when the Ethernet cables are connected and  
terminated correctly.  
PWR connector:  
• 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix connector.  
3
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Introduction  
1200V Panel Specifications (Cont.)  
Rear Panel Components  
(Cont.):  
(Side panel location on NXD-Wall Mount panels)  
Stereo Output connector:  
• Stereo output through a 3.5mm mini-jack (for use with external  
speakers).  
USB connector (2):  
• The two Type-A USB ports can connect up to two external keyboard or  
mouse devices for use with Virtual PC applications.  
Mini-USB connector:  
• 5-pin Mini-USB connector used for programming, firmware update, and  
touch panel file transfer between the PC and the target panel.  
Note: When connecting the panel to PC using a CC-USB (or compatible)  
cable, be sure to power the panel On before attempting to connect the  
USB cable from the PC to the mini-USB port on the panel.  
connections section on page 58 for more information.  
Operating / Storage  
Environment:  
• Operating Temperature: 10° C (50° F) to 40° C (104° F)  
• Operating Humidity: 20% to 85% RH  
• Storage Temperature: -20° C (-4° F) to 60° C (140° F)  
• Storage Humidity: 5% to 85% RH  
Included Accessories:  
• Installation Kit for 12" and 17" NXD panels (KA2251-01):  
- 2-pin mini-Phoenix connector (41-5025)  
- Four Drywall clips (62-5924-05) and #6 - sheet metal screws  
- One CAT5 Suppression Ferrites (04-0014)  
- Three Phillips-head screws (#4-20 x 0.250 Black)  
• Installation Kit for 12" NXT panels (KA2251-03):  
- 2-pin mini-Phoenix connector (41-5025)  
- Three Phillips-head screws (#4-20 x 0.250 Black)  
- Two CAT5 Suppression Ferrites (04-0014)  
• Modero Table Top Cable (CA2250-50)  
- provided with all NXT Table Top panels.  
• NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box (FG2254-10): Provides video/audio  
distribution to the A/V panel over CAT5 cable (up to 200’/60.96m) and  
accepts either Composite or S-Video.  
- Although the 1200V is only sold as part of a KIT configuration,  
the breakout box can be purchased separately.  
Other AMX Equipment:  
• CB-TP12 (FG031-10)  
- 12" metallic conduit box for Wall Mount installations.  
• CC-USB (Type-A) to Mini-B 5-Wire programming cable (FG10-5965)  
• MB-TP12 Universal VESA Mounting Box for NXD panels (FG031-50):  
- Black metallic VESA back box (62-0031-50)  
- Black plastic cover (with grommet opening) (60-0031-50)  
- Strain relief grommet (45-0004-03)  
- Four Phillips pan-head screws (#8-32 x 0.50 Black) (80-0146-02)  
- Twelve Under-cut Phillips-head screws (#6-32 x 0.500 Black) (80-  
0139)  
• NXA-BASE/B (FG2255)  
- Wireless base for Table Top touch panels (NXT models only).  
• NXA-KLB Kensington Lock Kit for NXT panels (FG2259-10)  
(optional only with NXT models)  
• NXA-PCI80211G Wireless Card (FG2255-04)  
- Although both panel types have the antennas pre-installed, installation  
of the optional mini-PCI card is required to initiate wireless  
communication.  
4
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Introduction  
1200V Panel Specifications (Cont.)  
Other AMX Equipment (Cont.):  
• NXA-RK12 (FG2904-50)  
- RackMount kit for 12" Wall Mount touch panels (NXD models only).  
• NXT-BP (FG2250-10)  
- Battery pack for Table Top panels. Provides 4 hours of continual  
operation (NXT models only)  
• NXT-CHG (FG2250-50)  
- Battery charger for NXT-BP batteries. Charges batteries in 8 hours.  
• Upgrade Compact Flash (factory programmed with firmware):  
NXA-CFTPV256M - 256 MB V/VG compact flash card (FG2116-43)  
NXA-CFTPV512M - 512 MB V/VG compact flash card (FG2116-44)  
NXA-CFTPV1G - 1 GB V/VG compact flash card (FG2116-45)  
1200V-Series Modero Connectors  
FIG. 2 shows the connectors on the 1200V Modero Video panels. The Audio/Video RJ-45 connector  
provides differential audio/video signals between the touch panel and the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET.  
This connector routes Composite video, Stereo (left/right) audio, and microphone audio.  
NXT-1200V - connectors located  
NXD-1200V - connectors located  
on left side panel  
on rear panel of the base  
A
L
12VDC  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
ETHERNET  
PROGRAM  
PWR  
Stereo  
Output  
Keyboard/Mouse  
USB connectors (2)  
Audio-Video from  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET  
(CAT5)  
Mini-USB  
(Program Port)  
Power  
Ethernet  
(CAT5)  
FIG. 2 Connector layout on sample 1200V Video Touch Panels  
Cleaning the Touch Overlay  
You should clean the touch screen overlay after each day’s use. Always use clean cotton cloths and a  
spray bottle containing water.  
5
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Introduction  
Connecting and Using Input Devices  
The 1200V panel can have up to two USB-capable input devices connected for use on its different  
firmware and TPD4 panel pages. These input devices can consist of a keyboard or mouse.  
USB-connected input devices are not detected and recognized by the panel until  
power is cycled to the unit.  
A mini-USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active  
panel. Connection to a previously powered panel, allows the PC to detect the  
panel and assign an appropriate USB driver.  
1. Insert the input device USB connectors into the appropriate USB connector on the panel.  
2. Press the on-screen Reboot button from the Protected Setup page to save any changes and restart  
the panel.  
3. After the panel splash-screen disappears:  
If a USB mouse has been connected, a mouse cursor appears on the panel screen and its  
location corresponds to the mouse cursor position sent by the external USB mouse.  
If a USB keyboard has been connected, only on-screen keyboards and keypads will reflect any external  
keystrokes sent from the external USB keyboard.  
6
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Touch Panel Accessories  
Touch Panel Accessories  
The following section outlines and describes both the included accessories and other AMX equipment  
available for these touch panels.  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box (FG2254-10)  
The NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box (FIG. 3) is included as part of the 1200V Kit configuration  
(panel and box) but can be purchased as a separate accessory. This box facilitates the installation and  
distribution of video, data, and audio to Modero touch panels located up to 200 feet (60.96 m) from the  
AVB box. This unit accepts either Composite or S-Video from standard video devices.  
This breakout box can be mounted on either a horizontal flat surface or in an equipment rack  
(by using an optional AC-RK Rack Kit).  
Composite/  
S-Video  
Luma  
Ethernet (to panel)  
S-Video Chroma  
Power In  
(rear)  
(front)  
Audio  
In  
Audio/Video  
(to panel)  
Ethernet In  
Mic Out  
Power (to panel)  
FIG. 3 NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box (front and rear views)  
Product Specifications  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Specifications  
Dimensions (HWD):  
• 1.50" x 5.55" x 4.88" (3.81 cm x 14.10 cm x 12.40 cm)  
• Width when attached to mounting ears: 6.65" (16.89 cm)  
• 50mA (with audio/video input)  
Power Consumption:  
• 23mA (with no audio/video)  
• Routed through NXA-AVB/Ethernet using a 12 VDC-compliant power supply  
• FCC Part 15 Class B, CE, and EN 60950  
Certifications:  
Features:  
• Accepts either Composite or S-Video (video-capable panels only)  
• Provides audio distribution to the non-video touch panels over a CAT5 cable  
(up to 200 ft.)  
• Provides video/audio distribution to the video-capable touch panels over  
CAT5 cable up to 200 ft. (60.9 m)  
Availability:  
• This unit is included with CV5, CV7, CV10, and 1200V-Series Kit  
configurations  
Front Components:  
• 2-pin 3.5 mm Phoenix connector for power to the touch panel  
• Green LED provides an indication of power status  
• RJ-45 connector provides Ethernet signals to the touch panel  
• RJ-45 connector provides differential audio and video signals to the touch  
panel (panel type dependant)  
7
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Touch Panel Accessories  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Specifications (Cont.)  
Rear Components:  
• 6-pin 3.5 mm Phoenix connector for in-bound (left/right channel) audio  
• 4-pin 3.5 mm Phoenix connector for out-bound (from microphone) audio  
• BNC connector (female) for Composite or Chroma (for video-capable  
panels only)  
• BNC connector (female) for luminance (for video-capable panels only)  
• RJ-45 connector for Ethernet input from the control system  
• 2-pin 3.5 mm Phoenix connector for in-bound power  
• Two 2-pin Phoenix connectors (41-5025)  
Included Accessories:  
Other AMX Equipment:  
• 4-pin Phoenix connector (41-5047)  
• 6-pin Phoenix connector (41-5063)  
• Rack Mount Kit (KA2250-40) with mounting bracket (62-2254-02)  
• AC-RK Accessory RackMount Kit (FG515)  
• Modero Table Top Cable (CA2250-50)  
Installing the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET  
A 12 VDC-compliant power supply can indirectly provide power to a Modero panel by routing power  
through the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box. FIG. 4 shows a sample wiring configuration using  
both an indirect or direct power connection for a video-capable Modero panel.  
Indirect  
Connect  
Line Level out  
(to amplifier  
or VOL card)  
Mic Out  
Ethernet In  
(RJ-45)  
(4-pin captive-wire)  
12 VDC power  
supply  
Video In  
(BNC)  
Audio In  
(6-pin captive-wire)  
(rear)  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET  
Breakout Box  
Power  
supplied via  
(front)  
NXA-AVB box  
Ethernet  
(CAT5)  
Audio/Video  
(CAT5)  
12 VDC power  
supply  
or  
Direct  
Connect  
NXD/T Video-capable  
Touch Panels  
FIG. 4 Sample wiring configuration on video-capable panels using this breakout box  
A 12 VDC-compliant power supply can also directly provide power through the unit to a target Modero  
panel. FIG. 5 shows a sample wiring configuration for a non-video capable Modero panel.  
Direct  
connect  
Ethernet  
(CAT5)  
Audio (CAT5)  
between the  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET  
Breakout Box  
12 VDC power  
supply  
NXD/T Non-video capable  
Touch Panels  
FIG. 5 Sample wiring configuration using CA Modero panels  
8
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Touch Panel Accessories  
The breakout box unit can be mounted on either a horizontal flat surface or into an  
equipment rack (by removing the front screws and attaching it to an optional AC-RK).  
The power supply being used on the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET is dependant on the  
power requirements of the target touch panel.  
Use a standard CAT5 Ethernet cable to provide both communication and 10/100 network connectivity  
between the panel, NXA-AVB/ETHERNET, NetLinx Master, and the network.  
Wiring the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET connectors and cables  
The inputs and outputs on the breakout box are separated into front and rear connectors. The rear  
connectors are used to input external signals. The front connectors are used to communicate signals  
between the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET and a target Modero panel. FIG. 6 provides a layout of the wiring  
connection both into and from the breakout box.  
GND  
F
R
O
N
T
Audio In - Left Channel  
In (-)  
(6-pin captive wire)  
In (+)  
GND  
In (-)  
Audio In - Right Channel  
(6-pin captive wire)  
In (+)  
GND(-)  
Out (-)  
Microphone Out  
Out (+)  
(4-pin captive wire)  
Comp/Y (BNC)  
C (BNC)  
Audio/Video  
(CAT5)  
Ethernet  
(RJ-45)  
Ethernet Out  
(CAT5)  
R
E
A
R
Power to  
touch panel  
12 VDC power  
supply  
FIG. 6 NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box connector wiring diagram  
The rear-panel wiring connections are described below (from left to right):  
• AUDIO IN:  
6-pin mini-Phoenix connector, divided into left and right audio channels. Each  
channel is divided into GND, IN+, and IN- terminal cable connectors  
(2 sets of 3 for each channel).  
An example of this cable is to strip the ends of 2 RCA audio cables and insert  
them into their respective locations on the Audio In port.  
Either a balanced (+, -, and GND) or unbalanced (+ and GND) audio  
signal can be connected to this input.  
• MIC OUT:  
4-pin mini-Phoenix connector, divided into GND, OUT-, and OUT+ terminal  
connectors.  
An example of this cable is to strip the terminal ends of a 3.5mm mini-jack and  
insert them into their respective locations on the Mic Out port. This signal can  
be fed as a Line Level In to either an amplifier or an AMX VOL card.  
Either a balanced (+, -, and GND) or unbalanced (+ and GND) audio signal  
can be connected to this output.  
• Video In BNCs: Feeds either Composite/S-Video Luma or S-Video Chroma signals into the  
NXA-AVB/ETHERNET. This feed is then redirected out to a Modero panel  
through the front Audio/Video CAT5 port.  
• ETHERNET:  
RJ-45 connector routes data to the G4 touch panel through the front Ethernet  
port. These connections use a standard CAT5 Ethernet cable to provide  
communication between the target touch panel, breakout box, and NetLinx  
Master.  
9
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Touch Panel Accessories  
• PWR:  
2-pin mini-Phoenix connector that connects to a 12 VDC-compliant power  
supply. This port can be used to provide power to a Modero panel by sending it  
through the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET (rear power connector through to the front  
power connector).  
Wiring the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET for Unbalanced Audio  
Most domestic audio equipment has unbalanced audio inputs and outputs. This means that the audio  
output (left, right, or mono) appears on a single wire, and is referenced to "0 V" or "Ground". Typical  
connectors used are RCA "phono" connectors, DIN plugs/sockets, and 0.25" (6.3mm) or 3.5mm jack  
plugs/sockets.  
Unbalanced audio is adequate for most domestic environments and for line-level signals in a typical  
broadcast studio. Problems may occur if the signals are carried over long distances, especially if the  
source and destination have separate main supplies. Use the following wiring drawing (FIG. 7) to  
configure an unbalanced audio connection.  
GND  
Unbalanced IN  
(Jumper IN- to GND)  
Left Channel  
IN-  
IN+  
GND  
Unbalanced IN  
(Jumper IN- to GND)  
Right Channel  
Microphone  
IN-  
IN+  
AUDIO IN  
MIC OUT  
GND  
Unbalanced OUT  
OUT-  
OUT+  
FIG. 7 Wiring the rear AUDIO IN and MIC OUT for use with Unbalanced Audio  
When using unbalanced audio for the AUDIO IN connector (FIG. 7), the "-" and the "GND" terminals  
should be connected together and then connected to the GND of the unbalance audio signal. When  
connecting to an unbalanced audio input from the MIC OUT connector (FIG. 7), wire the "+" terminal to  
the signal input, and the "GND" terminal to the signal ground.  
Wiring the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET for Balanced Audio  
Professional audio equipment will often use balanced audio inputs and outputs, usually on 3-pin "XLR"  
connectors. A balanced audio signal consists of a pair of wires carrying the audio signal in anti-phase  
with each other (if one wire carries a positive voltage, the other carries an equal and opposite negative  
voltage).  
The advantage of balanced audio over unbalanced audio is its ability to reject external interference added  
as the signal is carried over the wire. The receiving equipment takes the voltage difference between the  
two wires as the input signal. Interference will usually get added to both wires equally, and so gets  
cancelled by the receiving equipment.  
10  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Touch Panel Accessories  
The 3 wires used in a typical XLR lead are often referred to as Ground, Live (Hot) and Return (Cold).  
"Live" and "Return" carry the "in-phase" and "out-of-phase" versions of the audio respectively. The pins  
of the XLR plug/socket are as follows:  
• X = Ground  
• L = Live (Hot)  
• R = Return (Cold)  
When connecting the MIC OUT connector to a balanced audio input (FIG. 8), use all three audio  
terminals (+, -, and GND), then connect the "+" terminal to the "live" signal, the "-" terminal to the  
"return" signal, and the "GND" terminal to the ground signal.  
Ground signal  
GND  
Return signal  
Balanced OUT  
OUT-  
Line signal  
OUT+  
FIG. 8 Wiring the rear MIC OUT connector for use with Balanced Audio  
Modero Table Top Cable (CA2250-50)  
The Modero Table Top Touch Panels come with a standard 10' (3.048 m) Modero cable  
(CA2250-50) that supports Ethernet, Audio/Video, and Power connections. The cable comes terminated  
with two RJ45 connectors (Ethernet and Audio/Video) and a single 2-pin mini-Phoenix connector for  
power.  
FIG. 9 10 Foot Modero Table Top Cable  
Product Specifications  
Modero Table Top Cable Specifications  
Dimensions (HWD):  
Connectors:  
• Length: 10 feet (3.048 m)  
• Ethernet RJ-45 connector (White) routes Ethernet signals between the touch  
panel and the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box.  
• Audio/Video RJ-45 connector (Black) routes differential audio/video signals  
between the touch panel and the box.  
• 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix power connector to route power from the external  
breakout box to the target panel.  
Included Accessories:  
• Modero Table Top Cable (CA2250-50)  
11  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Touch Panel Accessories  
Modero Table Top Cable Specifications (Cont.)  
Other AMX Equipment:  
Note: All 1200V, VG-Series, and CV10 Table Top panels routing an  
Audio/Video signal from a breakout box must use the appropriate number of  
CAT5 Suppression Ferrites which are included as part of installation kits  
accompanying your particular Modero panel.  
Each of the following Installation Kits come with the appropriate number of  
CAT5 Suppression Ferrites.  
These ferrites must be installed onto their appropriate locations.  
• Installation Kit for 12" and 17" NXD panels (KA2251-01):  
- 2-pin mini-Phoenix connector (41-5025)  
- Three Phillips-head screws (#4-20 x 0.250 Black) (80-0114-08)  
- One CAT5 Suppression Ferrite (04-0014)  
- Four Drywall clips (62-5924-05) and #6 -metal strips (80-0192)  
• Installation Kit for 15" NXD panels (KA2251-02):  
- 2-pin mini-Phoenix connector (41-5025)  
- Three Phillips-head screws (#4-20 x 0.250 Black) (80-0114-08)  
- Two CAT5 Suppression Ferrites (04-0014)  
- Four Drywall clips (62-5924-05) and #6 -metal strips (80-0192)  
• Installation Kit for 12" NXT panels (KA2251-03):  
- 2-pin mini-Phoenix connector (41-5025)  
- Three Phillips-head screws (#4-20 x 0.250 Black) (80-0114-08)  
- Two CAT5 Suppression Ferrites (04-0014)  
• Installation Kit for 15" and 17" NXT panels (KA2251-04):  
- 2-pin mini-Phoenix connector (41-5025)  
- Three Phillips-head screws (#4-20 x 0.250 Black) (80-0114-08)  
- One CAT5 Suppression Ferrite (04-0014)  
• Installation Kit for 10" NXT panels (KA2259-01):  
- 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix connector (41-5025)  
- One CAT5 Table Top Suppression Ferrite (04-0014)  
- One cylindrical CAT5 USB Mouse Suppression Ferrite (04-0018-SA)  
Wiring information for the Modero Table Top cable  
If your installation requires custom cable configurations, you can purchase bulk (non-terminated) cable  
from Liberty Wire and Cable under the nomenclature "AMX Table Top Cable - Modero" (phone#:  
(800) 530 8998 or +1-719-388-7518). When building a custom Table Top cable, please refer to the table  
below to calculate the maximum length of the cable for your particular installation/setup.  
Maximum Table Top Cable Lengths for Modero Panels  
Panel Sizes:  
Setup I: Using a panel without a battery base*:  
Maximum cable length 150’ (45.72 m) 150’ (45.72 m) 49’ (14.94 m) 39’ (11.89 m) 10’ (3.05 m)  
Setup II: Using a panel with a battery base*:  
7" Panel  
10" Panel  
12" Panel  
15" Panel  
17" Panel  
Maximum cable length  
56’ (17.07 m) 56’ (17.07 m) 25’ (7.62 m)  
15’ (4.57 m)  
10’ (3.05 m)  
* The total Modero cable run from the 13.5 V power source.  
* The total Modero cable run from the 13.5 V power source (12 VDC-compliant power supply).  
12  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Touch Panel Accessories  
FIG. 10 shows the top and cross-section views of the Table Top cable.  
6 inches  
3 inches  
Red  
3
2
3
2
1
1
Red  
To Touch Panel  
To Breakout Box  
Connector  
Connector  
1
2
- used for Audio/Video (Black)  
- used for Ethernet (White)  
Connector  
3
- used for Power  
FIG. 10 Modero Table Top cable (top and cross-section views)  
The following table provides the wiring information (color coding) for each of the three available cable  
connectors on each side of the Modero Table Top Cable.  
Modero Table Top Cable Wiring Table  
Wire  
Connector 1  
White/Orange  
Orange/White  
White/Green  
Blue/White  
Connector 2  
White/Orange  
Orange/White  
White/Green  
Blue/White  
Connector 3  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Red  
Black  
-
-
-
-
-
-
White/Blue  
White/Blue  
Green/White  
White/Brown  
Brown/White  
Green/White  
White/Brown  
Brown/White  
The following figures provide a cross-section view (FIG. 11) and a description (FIG. 12) of the Modero  
Table Top Cable:  
Element #1  
Connector #1 & 2  
Binder  
Element #2  
Connector #3  
Jacket  
FIG. 11 Table Top Cable - cross-section view  
13  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Touch Panel Accessories  
DESCRIPTION:  
9/PAIRS COMPOSITE CABLE CONSISTING OF: ELEMENT #1:  
TWO 4/PAIR 24 AWG STRANDED TINNED COPPER,  
POLYETHYLENE INSULATION, ELEMENT #2: 1/PAIR 18 AWG  
STRANDED TNNED COPPER, PVC INSULATION AND FOIL  
SHIELDED OVERALL PAPER BINDER AND FLEX-PVC JACKET.  
ELEMENT #1:  
CONDUCTOR: 24 AWG 7/32 TINNED COPPER; OD .024" NOMINAL  
INSULATION: .0075" WALL POLYETHYLENE; OD .039" NOMINAL  
2 X 4/PAIRS:  
24 AWG STRANDED COPPER  
COLOR CODE: P1: WHITE/BLUE, BLUE  
P2: WHITE/ORANGE, ORANGE  
P3: WHITE/GREEN, GREEN  
P4: WHITE/BROWN, BROWN  
2 CONDUCTORS TWINNED LEFT HAND LAY  
PAIR:  
(TWISTED AT VARIED LAYS TO MINIMIZE CROSS TALK)  
4/P CABLED LEFT HAND LAY (BLUE BINDER, ORANGE BINDER)  
PAPER TAPE  
CABLE:  
BINDER:  
ELEMENT #2:  
1 PAIR: 18 AWG SHIELDED  
CONDUCTOR: 18 AWG 16/30 TINNED COPPER; OD .046" NOMINAL  
INSULATION: .010" WALL PVC; OD .066" NOMINAL  
COLOR CODE: BLACK, RED  
DRAIN WIRE:  
SHIELD:  
#22 7/30 TINNED COPPER  
ALUM/POLYESTER TAPE (FOIL SIDE IN)  
FINAL ASSEMBLY: TWO ELEMENT #1 & ELEMENT #2 CABLED ON COMMON  
AXIS TO MINIMIZE DIAMETER  
BINDER:  
JACKET:  
COLOR:  
CLOTH TAPE 25% OVERLAP  
.045" WALL FLEXIBLE PVC,  
BLACK MATT  
DIAMETER:  
MARKING:  
.375 INCHES NOMINAL  
NONE  
FIG. 12 Table Top Cable - Specification Elements  
Each bundle of 4 twisted pairs includes a colored tape indicator for identification.  
Installing CAT5 Suppression Ferrites  
Before connecting the RJ-45 cables to the panel, install the necessary number of CAT5 Suppression  
Ferrites (FIG. 13) to their appropriate locations. These ferrites come as part of the Installation Kits  
mentioned in the previous Specification table (page 2). No tools are required for this installation.  
Release the latch to  
open the plastic  
enclosure.  
Insert the CAT5  
cable and close  
the enclosure.  
Push down on the  
enclosure until it  
snaps closed.  
FIG. 13 Installing the CAT5 Suppression Ferrites  
All 1200V-Series, VG-Series, and Table Top CV10 panels require the installation of  
an appropriate number of CAT5 Suppression Ferrites when they use an RJ-45 cable  
to feed an A/V signal from the breakout box.  
1. The CAT5 Suppression Ferrite is housed within a plastic enclosure (shown in FIG. 12) with a latch  
release on one side. Pull to release the latch and open the enclosure.  
14  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
       
Touch Panel Accessories  
2. Grasp the Black RJ-45 Audio/Video cable being connected to the panel. This end of the cable is  
longer than the opposing end which connects to the breakout box (6 inches vs 3 inches). Refer to  
FIG. 14 for more detailed information.  
3. Insert the panel-end of the Black RJ-45 Audio/Video cable into the groove along the inside of the  
enclosure.  
The CAT5 Suppression Ferrites MUST be installed onto the cable connected to the  
Modero’s Audio/Video RJ-45 connector (just behind the connector).  
4. Snap the enclosure shut with the cable inside, and you’re done.  
5. Repeat this process again only when installing an additional CAT5 Suppression Ferrite  
(model specific).  
3
2
e
t
i
r
r
e
F
Ferrite  
1
To Touch  
Panel  
6 inches  
Connector  
Connector  
1
2
- used for Audio/Video (Black) Connector  
- used for Ethernet (White)  
3
- used for Power  
FIG. 14 Ferrite connector location on Audio/Video RJ-45 cable  
NXA-CFTP Compact Flash (FG2116-2x)  
Every Modero panel is shipped with two factory default modules: an EXM Memory Module and a  
Compact Flash card. These panels are shipped with a 256 memory module which is not  
upgradeable.  
The default 128 MB Compact Flash card is factory programmed with specific panel firmware and is the  
only upgradeable memory component. This component can be ordered from AMX in several different  
upgrade sizes (as listed in the following table):  
Optional Compact Flash Memory Upgrades  
Compact Flash:  
NXA-CFTP256M - 256 MB Compact Flash card  
NXA-CFTP512M - 512 MB Compact Flash card  
NXA-CFTP1G - 1 GB Compact Flash card  
(FG2116-23)  
(FG2116-24)  
(FG2116-25)  
Upgrading the internal components involves opening the panel enclosure/outer housing to access the  
internal circuit board, removing the existing part, and replacing them with the upgrade components, as  
described in the following sections.  
It is recommended that any upgrade of internal equipment be done simultaneously in  
order to reduce the risk of damage to internal components.  
15  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Touch Panel Accessories  
NXA-PCI80211G Wireless Card (FG2255-04)  
The 1200V-Series and VG-Series Modero touch panels can connect to an internal NXA-PCI80211G  
compatible mini-PCI Wireless Card connected to two antennas (57-2250-10). All 1200-V and VG-Series  
panels come factory installed only with the two antennas used for later connection to the optional  
wireless card which is field-installable.  
FIG. 15 NXA-PCI80211G mini-PCI Wireless Card  
The NXA-PCI80211G card functions using a 2.4GHz bandwidth with a maximum data transfer rate of  
54Mbps. This card is compatible with IEEE 802.11 standards such as: 802.11b and 802.11g.  
The NXA-80211G allows the end-user to take advantage of larger bandwidth to utilize features such as:  
wireless intercom, Motion JPEG, networked video, and standard wireless Ethernet communication to  
both a NetLinx controller and networked computers. Please follow your particular Wireless Access  
Point’s instruction manual for the correct procedures to setup either a secured or unsecured connection.  
FCC Statement:  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Subject to the following two conditions:  
1. This device must not cause harmful interference and  
2. This device must accept all interference, including interference that interferes with the  
operation of this device.  
Modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer will void the user’s authority  
to operate the equipment.  
WARNING: This device has been evaluated and found to be compliant with the FCC Rules  
for RF Exposure when the device is operated at a minimum separation distance from the  
user and nearby persons. Operation of this device at closer distances should be avoided.  
Certifications: FCCID: CWU-WN2301A, CE, EN 60950, EN 300 328,  
and RSS 210  
Product Specifications  
NXA-PCI80211G Specifications  
Dimensions (HWD):  
Weight:  
• 0.02" x 2.13" x 4.66" (5.0 mm x 54.0 mm x 118.4 mm)  
• 1.05 oz (30g)  
Description:  
• Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS)/CCK 802.11g Wireless mini-PCI  
card with detachable antennas.  
Features:  
• Contains integrated power amplifier (PA) and low-noise amplifier (LNA)  
• Diversity Antenna Connectors automatically select the best available signal  
• Enhanced transmit and receive chains  
• Field-installable  
• Increased sensitivity and multipath tolerance  
• Operates from 2.300-2.500 GHz  
• Operate at ISM frequency bands (2.4GHz) with 54Mbps data rate  
• Pre-configured to communicate with current AMX Wireless Access Points  
• Support for IEEE 802.11b and 802.11g  
• Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) 64-bit and 128-bit data encryption  
16  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Touch Panel Accessories  
NXA-PCI80211G Specifications (Cont.)  
Antenna Type:  
Availability:  
• Dual antenna connector  
• All 1200V-Series and VG-Series NXT Table Top panels come factory  
configured for wireless communication. These NXT panels are all factory  
installed with both the NXA-80211G wireless mini-PCI and 2 antennas.  
• Optional to the following NXD panels:  
- NXD-1200V  
- NXD-1200VG  
- NXD-1500VG  
- NXD-1700VG  
Bus Interface:  
Certifications:  
• mini-PCI card, TypeIIIB  
• FCCID: CWU-WN2301A, CE, EN 60950, EN 300 328, and RSS 210and  
FCCID (CWU-WN2301A)  
Frequency Range:  
• Using 802.11b & g communication:  
- 2.412 ~ 2.462 GHz - North America  
- 2.412 ~ 2.484 GHz - Japan  
- 2.412 ~ 2.472 GHz - Europe ETSI  
- 2.457 ~ 2.462 GHz - Spain  
- 2.457 ~ 2.472 GHz - France  
Media Access Technique:  
Modulation:  
• CSMA/CA with ACK  
• Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) / Complementary Code  
Keying (CCK)  
Network Architecture:  
Network Standard:  
Operating Channels:  
• Ad-hoc mode (Peer-to-Peer)  
• Infrastructure mode  
• IEEE Compliant  
• 802.11b and 802.11g  
• Using 802.11b & g communication:  
- 11: (Ch 1 - 11) - North America  
- 14: (Ch 1 - 14) - Japan  
- 13: (Ch 1 - 13) - Europe ETSI  
- 2: (Ch 10 - 11) - Spain  
- 4: (Ch 10 - 13) - France  
Operating Environment:  
Temperature: 0°C ~ 55°C (32°F to 131°F) (operating) and  
-20°C ~ 70°C (-4°F to 158°F) (storage)  
• Humidity: (non-condensing) 5% ~ 90% RH (operating) and  
(non-condensing) 5% ~ 95% RH (storage)  
Operating Voltage:  
• 3.3V + 5% I/O supply voltage  
Power Consumption:  
• @ 802.11b communication:  
- RX: 300 mA  
- TX: 64 mA  
- Sleep: 12mA  
• @ 802.11g communication:  
- RX: 330 mA  
- TX: 575 mA  
- Sleep: 12mA  
Radio Data Rate:  
• 802.11g compliant: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 (DSSS/CCK); 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, and 54  
(OFDM) Mbps data rates  
17  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Touch Panel Accessories  
NXA-PCI80211G Specifications (Cont.)  
Receiver Sensitivity:  
• Using 802.11b communication:  
1 Mbps: -86 dBm (max)  
2 Mbps: -84 dBm (max)  
5.5 Mbps: -83 dBm (max)  
11 Mbps: -80 dBm (max)  
• Using 802.11g communication:  
1 Mbps: -86 dBm (max)  
2 Mbps: -84 dBm (max)  
5.5 Mbps: -83 dBm (max)  
11 Mbps: -80 dBm (max)  
Security:  
• 64-bit and 128-bit WEP  
Availability:  
• All 1200V-Series and VG-Series NXT Table Top panels can be field upgraded  
for wireless communication using the optional NXA-PCI80211G mini-PCI  
card.  
• Optional to the following NXD panels:  
- NXD-1200V  
- NXD-1200VG  
- NXD-1500VG  
- NXD-1700VG  
Installation and Upgrade of the Internal NXT Components  
Upgrading the components within the Table Top panel involves removing the outer housing (with  
speaker plate), removing and/or installing an existing component, and then placing the outer housing  
back onto the NXT panel, as described in the following sections.  
Do not use Ethernet cables containing mounting boots. These boots could make  
removal of the Ethernet connectors (from the panel) difficult and cumbersome.  
Step 1: Remove the existing NXT Outer Housing  
1. Carefully detach all connectors from the rear of the touch panel and then gently place the touch  
panel LCD facedown onto a soft cloth to expose the under-side of the base (FIG. 16). This step  
helps prevent scratching of the LCD.  
2. Tilt the base forward so that both the bottom surface and Housing Screws are easily accessible and  
then carefully remove the four plastic adhesive feet.  
Reference the location of the four plastic adhesive "feet". Once the outer housing is  
placed back onto the panel, these "feet" must be placed back in their original  
locations so they can fit into their provided openings on a Battery Base.  
3. While holding the outer housing and base plate at a 45° (to prevent it from sliding), use a grounded  
Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the eight Housing Screws.  
18  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Touch Panel Accessories  
Base plate  
Outer housing  
Unscrew these  
eight Housing  
Screws to remove  
the circuit board  
housing  
45°  
Hinge Brackets (2)  
DO NOT  
REMOVE  
these screws  
They secure  
the speakers  
to the main  
board  
FIG. 16 Location of the attachment screws underneath an NXT panel base  
4. Rotate the panel back over (while gripping the entire unit with outer housing) and rest the base on a  
flat surface.  
5. Gently tilt the LCD backward to a 45° angle.  
6. In a single motion, carefully pull the outer housing up and then out (away from the LCD panel) to  
expose the internal circuit board.  
7. Unscrew the Stereo Output nut from the Stereo Output jack.  
8. Firmly grab the existing connector plate and slide it up and away from the base.  
Step 2: Install the 802.11g mini-PCI Wireless Card  
1. Discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a grounded metal object.  
2. Locate the mini-PCI card connector on the main board (FIG. 17 and FIG. 18).  
Outer Housing  
NXA-PCI80211G  
wireless card  
location  
I/O connector  
plate  
Eight Housing  
Screws  
Compact Flash card  
FIG. 17 Location of the NXA-PCI80211G wireless card on the NXT board  
19  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Touch Panel Accessories  
FIG. 18 Location of the mini-PCI card connector on main board  
3. Carefully remove the gold-tipped terminal ends of the antenna from their factory default connectors  
on the main board. The antenna is secured at this location to restrict its movement prior to  
connection to a wireless card.  
4. Firmly grasp the NXA-PCI80211G mini-PCI card (from the edges) and insert the pins (at a 25°  
angle) into the opening on the connector (FIG. 19).  
5. While maintaining the 25° angle alignment on the new module, push it in firmly until the contact  
pins are completely inside the connector and the card "snaps" into place (FIG. 19).  
6. Push the card downward (to the main board) until the side braces snap atop the NXA-PCI80211G  
and hold it in place.  
Antennas connectors  
Connection point  
between the braces and  
the mini-PCI card  
FIG. 19 Installation of the mini-PCI card connector on main board  
7. Locate the terminal ends of the antennas and apply downward pressure to "snap" them onto their  
gold-tipped counterparts on the mini-PCI card (FIG. 19). Carefully push down on each connector to  
verify it is securely joined to the card.  
It is recommended that any upgrade of internal equipment be done simultaneously in  
order to reduce the risk of damage to internal components.  
20  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Touch Panel Accessories  
Step 3: Install the Compact Flash Memory Card upgrade  
1. Discharge any static electricity from your body by touching a grounded metal object and then locate  
the existing Compact Flash card (factory-shipped with 128 MB) on the main board (FIG. 20 for  
Table Top panels and FIG. 23 for Wall Mount panels).  
Outer Housing  
NXA-PCI80211G  
wireless card  
I/O connector  
plate  
Eight Housing  
Screws  
Compact Flash card  
FIG. 20 Location of the Compact Flash card and I/O plate on NXT  
2. Insert the tip of a grounded flat-head screwdriver into one of the card removal grooves (located on  
either side of the existing card), and gently pry the card out of the slot (FIG. 21). Repeat this process  
on the opposite card removal groove. This alternating action causes the card to "wiggle" away from  
the on-board connector pins.  
Card removal  
grooves  
On-board Compact  
Flash connector (with pins)  
Insert with arrow  
facing towards the pins  
Connector opening  
FIG. 21 Removing/installing a Compact Flash Memory card  
3. Grip the old card by its sides and then carefully pull it out of the slot.  
4. Remove the new CF memory card from it’s anti-static bag.  
21  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Touch Panel Accessories  
5. Grip the sides of the new CF memory card and firmly insert it into the slot opening (with the arrow  
facing towards the pins) until the contact pins are completely inside the flash card and it is then  
securely attached to the pin sockets.  
6. To complete the upgrade process, close and resecure the panel enclosure using the procedures in the  
following step.  
Any new internal card upgrade is detected by the panel only after power is cycled.  
Step 4: Close and Resecure the NXT Panel Enclosure  
1. Obtain the I/O connector plate and slide it back into position (FIG. 20).  
2. Resecure the Stereo Output nut back onto the new Stereo Output jack onto the I/O plate.  
3. With the components securely installed, tilt the LCD back to a 45° and gently slide-on the outer  
housing (towards the LCD) until the it is aligned over the installation holes and the tilt bracket  
prevents any further forward movement (FIG. 16).  
4. Gently press down on the housing (toward the base) until it is securely positioned over the circuit  
board and covers base.  
Use caution when re-installing the outer housing. Improper re-installation can cause  
damage to the internal speakers.  
5. While holding the outer housing and base plate in place, turn the panel back over until the LCD lies  
facedown on a soft cloth and the under-side of the base is exposed.  
6. Insert and secure the eight Housing Screws (using a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver) into their  
respective locations (FIG. 16).  
7. Replace any adhesive plastic "feet" that might have been removed during the removal process of the  
outer housing. These "feet" must be placed back onto their original locations so they can fit into  
their provided openings on the Battery Base.  
8. Grasp both the LCD and housing and then rotate the entire unit back onto a flat surface.  
9. Insert all connectors and apply power.  
Installation and Upgrade of the Internal NXD Components  
Upgrading the components within a WallMount panel involves removing the rear plastic outer housing  
(back box), removing and/or installing an existing component, and then placing the back box back onto  
the NXD panel, as described in the following sections.  
Step 1: Remove the existing NXD Outer Housing  
1. Carefully detach all connectors from the side of the touch panel and remove the front magnetic  
faceplate from the NXD unit by firmly gripping the faceplate and pulling outwards, while applying  
a small amount of pressure to remove it from the main unit.  
2. Place the LCD facedown onto a soft cloth to expose the under-side of the unit (FIG. 22). This step  
helps prevent scratching of the LCD.  
3. Unscrew the Stereo Output nut from the Stereo Output jack.  
22  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Touch Panel Accessories  
4. Remove the I/O connector plate by using a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the two  
screws and slide the I/O connector plate away from the back box housing.  
DO NOT  
REMOVE  
DO NOT REMOVE  
these panel  
securing screws  
these  
panel  
securing  
screws  
Unscrew these four Housing Screws  
to remove the back box. These make direct  
contact with the black outer housing.  
FIG. 22 Location of the securing screws on an NXD panel  
DO NOT REMOVE THE PANEL SECURING SCREWS. These screws secure the  
LCD to the metallic casing.  
5. Unscrew the four pan-head Housing Screws from the rear of the NXD unit (FIG. 22) and gently  
remove the outer housing. These four screws secure the back box to the internal panel casing.  
Step 2: Install the new 802.11g mini-PCI Wireless card (NXD)  
1. Complete the procedures outline within Step 2: Install the 802.11g mini-PCI Wireless Card section  
on page 19 and then continue with the following step.  
Step 3: Install the new Compact Flash Memory card (NXD)  
1. Complete the procedures outline within Step 3: Install the Compact Flash Memory Card  
upgrade section on page 21 and then continue with the following step.  
23  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Touch Panel Accessories  
Four Pan-head  
Outer Housing  
Housing  
Screws  
I/O connector  
plate  
NXA-PCI80211G  
wireless card  
location  
Compact Flash card  
FIG. 23 Location of the Compact Flash card and I/O plate on NXD  
Step 4: Close and Resecure the NXD Panel Enclosure  
1. With the components securely installed, gently place the outer housing back onto the metallic panel  
casing (with the connector opening on the right-side of the panel) and align the four pan-head  
Housing Screw holes along the edges of the outer housing.  
Use care not to bend or damage any antenna connections while replacing the outer  
housing.  
2. Insert and secure the four pan-head Housing Screws into the pre-drilled holes along the edges of the  
NXD unit by using a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver.  
3. Reinstall the I/O connector plate by aligning all connectors to their respective locations.  
4. Secure the I/O connector plate using a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver and then twist the Stereo  
Output nut back into the Stereo Output jack.  
24  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Touch Panel Accessories  
NXT-BP Power Pack (FG2255-10)  
The NXT-BP Power Pack (FIG. 24) is a rechargeable Lithium-Ion "smart" battery used to provide power  
to the NXT Modero panel through the NXA-BASE/B Battery Base. This battery incorporates an  
on-board battery life indicator. The NXT-BP battery can be charged through either the base (when  
connected to the Modero panel) or through an optional NXT-CHG Modero Power Station.  
Extra NXT-BP Power Packs can be purchased separately as an optional accessory.  
FIG. 24 NXT-BP Power Pack  
Product Specifications  
NXT-BP Specifications  
Dimensions (HWD):  
Power (Voltage):  
Weight:  
• 0.69" x 3.50" x 5.81" (1.75 cm x 8.89 cm x 14.76 cm)  
• 11.1 Volts (nominal)  
• Single NXT-BP Power Pack: 1.0 lbs (0.45 kg)  
• Battery Usage: 4 to 8 hours (time is usage dependant)  
• Charge Capacity: 6300mAh  
Features:  
Operating / Storage  
Environment:  
• Operating Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 40° C (104° F)  
• Operating Humidity: 20% - 85% RH  
• Storage/Discharge Temperature: -20° C (-4° F) to 60° C (140° F)  
• Storage Humidity: 5% - 85% RH  
NXA-BASE/B Battery Base Kit (FG2255K)  
The NXA-BASE/B Battery Base is a Modero accessory that allows the Modero Table Top touch panels  
(NXT) to function off the collective charge of two internally connected NXT-BP batteries (FG2255-10).  
The base provides both power and battery information to the panel via the panel interface connector  
(FIG. 25). The NXT-BP batteries can be charged through either the base (only when connected to the  
NXT touch panel) or through an optional NXT-CHG Modero Power Station.  
Panel Interface  
Connector  
NXT-BP  
NXA-BASE/B  
Battery Pack  
Battery Base  
FIG. 25 NXA-BASE/B and NXT-BP combo  
25  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
       
Touch Panel Accessories  
This base also comes as part of a NXA-BASE/B Kit that contains one (1) battery base and two batteries.  
The accompanying batteries can be charged through either the base or optional NXT-CHG Battery  
page 27 for more detailed installation and usage instructions.  
Product Specifications  
NXA-BASE/B Specifications  
Dimensions (HWD):  
Power Requirements:  
Weight:  
• 1.13" x 8.63" x 11.81" (2.86 cm x 21.91 cm x 30.00 cm)  
• 2.7 A @ 12 VDC (max power draw while charging)  
• Base unit: 1.25 lbs (0.567 kg)  
• Base and 2 batteries: 3.23 lbs (1.47 kg)  
Features:  
• Charge time for two depleted batteries ~ 5 - 8 hours (when NXT panel is in  
Sleep mode)  
• Must be connected to the Modero unit utilizing a 12 VDC-compliant power  
supply  
Operating / Storage  
Environment:  
• Operating Temperature: 0° C (32° F) to 40° C (104° F)  
• Operating Humidity: 20% - 85% RH  
• Storage Temperature: -20° C (-4° F) to 60° C (140° F)  
• Storage Humidity: 5% - 85% RH  
Other AMX Equipment:  
• NXT-CHG Kit (FG2250-50K):  
Charger (FG2250-50) and 2 NXT-BP batteries (FG2255-10)  
• NXT-BP battery pack (FG2255-10)  
• NXT-CHG battery charger (FG2250-50)  
It is recommended to fully charge the batteries before their initial use.  
Checking the NXT-BP battery charge  
1. Press the Battery Life Indicator button (FIG. 26) once to illuminate the Battery Life LEDs and  
display the percent charge remaining on the battery (this indication lasts a few seconds).  
Battery Life (Charge) Display  
Battery Life Indicator button  
FIG. 26 NXT-BP (showing Battery Life Indicator button and charge)  
2. Repeat the above step for each NXT-BP battery.  
3. Charge the NXT-BP battery by either inserting it into the battery base or from within the optional  
NXT-CHG charger (which can sequentially charge up to two batteries).  
If the 25% LED is blinking, this indicates there is less than 5% of a charge remaining  
on the battery.  
26  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Touch Panel Accessories  
Installing the NXA-BASE/B to an NXT Modero Panel  
The battery base must be installed onto the NXT panel without any NXT-BP batteries.  
1. Power Off the panel before attempting to use the NXA-BASE/B.  
2. Place the empty battery base onto a flat/level surface.  
3. Verify the alignment of the Panel Interface connectors between the panel (male connector) and base  
(female connector) (FIG. 27).  
Captive fasteners  
(secure base to  
panel)  
Battery Compartment  
pulls outwards  
Panel Interface  
connector (female)  
Alignment  
pegs  
FIG. 27 NXA-BASE/B showing Panel Interface and connector locations  
4. Carefully place the Modero panel over the base alignment pegs (FIG. 27 and FIG. 28).  
The battery base cannot be "hot-swapped". A panel receiving power through a  
connected 12 VDC-compliant power supply cannot have a battery base installed onto  
the bottom of the panel while powered. POWER OFF the panel before installing the  
NXA-BASE/B.  
"Hot swapping" could damage the base and cause it not to be recognized by the  
panel.  
5. Gently apply downward pressure until the panel is securely mounted to the battery base (FIG. 28).  
6. Firmly grip both the panel (from the side) and battery base (from below) together.  
7. Gently place the touch panel LCD facedown onto a soft cloth (this prevents scratching of the LCD  
while the battery base is being secured).  
8. Locate the captive fasteners on the underside of the battery base by angling the base combo slightly  
forwards.  
9. Secure each captive fastener head using a grounded flat-head screwdriver until the NXA-BASE/B is  
securely attached to the underside of the NXT Modero touch panel.  
10. Firmly grip the panel LCD/base combo and gently rotate the unit back onto the base.  
27  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Touch Panel Accessories  
Bottom view  
Top view  
Interface  
connector  
(male)  
Panel Interface  
connector  
(female)  
Alignment  
pegs  
Captive  
fasteners  
FIG. 28 NXA-BASE/B shown aligning with NXT panel  
Installing an NXT-BP into the NXA-BASE/B  
The battery base does not directly connect to a power supply, but rather receives its power directly from  
the Modero panel, through the Panel Interface connector.  
Remove any connectors from the rear of the Modero NXT panel before continuing  
with the installation of the batteries. Power can only be supplied after the batteries  
have been installed.  
1. With the panel mounted on the battery base, open the battery compartment (FIG. 29) by pulling the  
handle outwards. This compartment houses two NXT-BP batteries.  
NXT-BP Battery #2  
Battery  
Connectors  
Interface  
connector  
Battery  
Connector  
Port  
FRONT  
Battery #2  
slot  
NXT-BP Battery #1  
Battery  
Compartment  
FIG. 29 Battery installation procedure  
28  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Touch Panel Accessories  
2. Install the NXT-BP battery. label-side down.  
3. Align the battery connectors with the corresponding battery connector port (located inside the  
battery compartment), as shown in FIG. 29.  
4. Insert the NXT-BP battery until the connectors securely fit into the battery connector port.  
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for the other battery.  
6. Apply a small amount of pressure to close the battery compartment until the compartment latches.  
After a few seconds, the panel will turn On and the AMX logo will appear (indicating the  
panel is receiving power.  
Charging the NXT-BP batteries with the NXA-BASE/B  
1. Follow the procedures from the previous sub-section to attach the NXT touch panel to the  
NXA-BASE/B.  
2. Insert each battery into the battery compartment shown in FIG. 29.  
3. Insert a 2-pin connector from a power supply to the rear PWR connector on the NXT Modero panel.  
The charge status bargraph indicators, on the Battery Base page, indicate when the batteries  
are fully charged.  
The NXA-BASE/B will only charge batteries when the NXT panel is in Sleep mode.  
NXT-CHG Battery Charger Kit (FG2255-50K)  
The NXT-CHG Kit includes one charger and two batteries. The optional NXT-CHG Modero Power  
Station (FIG. 30) is a two-slot, stand-alone battery charger that can be used to recharge up to two  
NXT-BP batteries. The batteries are charged in the order they are inserted into the charger. The  
NXT-CHG Slot 1 has the feature of being able to completely discharge and recharge (recalibrate) a  
battery.  
Battery Life indicator  
NXT-BP Modero Power Pack (battery)  
NXT-CHG Modero Power Station (charger)  
FIG. 30 NXT-CHG Kit (consists of one NXT-CHG charger and two NXT-BP batteries)  
29  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Touch Panel Accessories  
Product Specifications  
NXT-BP and NXT-CHG Specifications  
Dimensions (HWD):  
Power Requirements:  
• 1.13" x 8.63" x 11.81" (2.86 cm x 21.91 cm x 30.00 cm)  
• NXT-BP Battery Voltage - 11.1 Volts  
• NXT-CHG: 90 - 264 VAC, 47-63 Hz, Single Phase  
(using the included 24 VDC power supply)  
Weight:  
• 0.57 lbs (0.26 kg)  
Features:  
• Charge time for two depleted batteries: ~ 5 hours  
• Charge Rate: 2.5 A @ 12 VDC  
• 2-Bays: Sequential charging  
• LED: One LED indicator in front of each bay which conveys the status of that  
bay. Refer to the Reading NXT-CHG LED Indicator section for more  
information.  
• Recalibration pushbutton (located between the bays): Initiates recalibration  
sequence in the left bay only.  
• Recalibration Time: less than 9 hours  
Other AMX Equipment:  
• NXT-CHG Kit (FG2250-50K):  
- 1 charger and 2 NXT-BP batteries  
• NXT-BP battery pack (FG2255-10) (additional)  
The batteries are charged in the order they are inserted into the NXT-CHG. SLOT 1 of the  
NXT-CHG has the ability to completely discharge and recharge (recalibrate) a battery.  
Recalibration improves the reporting accuracy of the battery charge back to the  
Modero panel.  
Powering the NXT-CHG  
The NXT-CHG Smart Battery Charger uses an included power supply to charge inserted batteries.  
1. Connect the rear of the NXT-CHG to the power adapter.  
2. Connect the power adapter to the provided power cord (with plug).  
3. Provide power to the unit by connecting the power cord (with plug) into a power outlet that meets  
the requirements outlined in the Specifications section for the NXT-CHG.  
Reading NXT-CHG LED Indicator  
FIG. 31 shows the components on the NXT-CHG Smart Battery Charger.  
Slot 1  
(recalibration)  
Slot 2  
Slot 1  
LED  
Slot 2  
LED  
Recalibrate  
Pushbutton  
FIG. 31 Component locations on the NXT-CHG  
30  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Touch Panel Accessories  
There is one LED indicator on the front of each battery slot that indicates the status of that slot. The blink  
patterns for these LEDs are described in the following table:  
Off:  
Green Flashing: Fast charging.  
Green Solid: Fully charged.  
Yellow Flashing: Recalibration in process.  
No battery detected.  
Yellow/Green:  
Yellow Solid:  
Red Flash:  
Recalibration complete.  
Standby (waiting for other battery to charge).  
Error (problem with either the battery connection to the internal slot, or with  
the battery itself).  
Charging the NXT-BP batteries using the NXT-CHG  
1. Review the Checking the NXT-BP battery charge section on page 26 to confirm the percentage of  
charge remaining on the batteries.  
2. Provide power to the charger (as outlined in the Powering the NXT-CHG section on page 30).  
3. Align the battery connector with the corresponding charge slot within each of the two NXT-CHG  
slots.  
4. Firmly insert the battery into the desired slot until the battery is both securely located within the slot  
and there is activity from the corresponding Slot LED. Refer to the Reading NXT-CHG LED  
Indicator section on page 30 section for LED information.  
Recalibrating the batteries  
The recalibration process increases the accuracy of the battery charge level. Recalibration of the batteries  
is only done upon request from the Modero on-screen Battery Base page. Refer to the Battery Base  
Page section on page 102 for more detailed Battery Base page information.  
Recalibration can only be done with Slot 1 on the NXT-CHG.  
1. Place the selected battery securely into Slot 1 (left slot) until there is activity on the Slot 1 LED.  
2. Push the Recalibration pushbutton (located between the two slots) to initiate recalibration in the  
left bay only.  
31  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Touch Panel Accessories  
32  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
NXT panels are mounted onto flat (horizontal) surfaces in either a stand-alone or combo (NXT atop an  
NXA-BASE/B battery base) configuration. NXD panels are installed into either a pre-wall surface (using  
a CB-TP12 conduit/wallbox) or a solid surface (using either solid surface or drywall screws).  
It is recommended that if you are planning on upgrading your panel components  
(flash card and wireless), you do so before beginning any panel installations.  
Unpacking the Panel  
1. Inspect and confirm the contents of the shipment box to verify that you have all specified parts.  
Refer to the Specifications sections on page 2 for more information about included accessories and  
other AMX equipment.  
2. Carefully remove the panel from the shipping box.  
3. Carefully peel the protective plastic cover from the LCD.  
If the protective plastic LCD cover is not removed, the panel may not respond  
properly to touch points on the LCD or allow proper screen calibration.  
Installing the Internal Components  
Installation of the internal components such as the upgraded Compact Flash memory and  
NXA-PCI80211G Wireless card are described in detail within the following sections:  
Upgrading to the MB-TP12 VESA Mounting Kit  
Upgrading the existing back box with the new VESA Mounting Kit on the 12" (FG031-50) panel  
requires 3 main processes:  
Removing the pre-existing back box and installing the new VESA back box.  
Threading cables through the strain relief grommet opening in the rear plastic cover.  
Finalizing the installation of the NXD (with VESA back box and cables) into the plastic cover,  
securing both components, and finalizing the strain relief grommet installation.  
Only overall dimensions and FG product numbers are different.  
The new MB-TP Universal VESA Mounting Box uses a standard VESA installation  
pattern of 75 mm between holes. VESA mounts that conform to this pattern can be  
used on the MB-TP Housing.  
33  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
       
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
Removing the Original Modero Back Box  
1. Detach all connectors from the side of the touch panel.  
2. Remove the magnetic faceplate from the NXD unit by gripping the faceplate and pulling outwards  
while applying a small amount of pressure to remove it from the main unit.  
3. Place the LCD face-down on a soft cloth to expose the back of the panel and prevent scratching of  
the LCD.  
4. Unscrew the Stereo Output nut from the Stereo Output jack.  
5. Remove the I/O connector plate by using a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver to remove the two  
screws and slide the I/O connector plate away from the back box housing.  
6. Remove the four pan-head Housing Screws from the rear of the NXD unit (FIG. 32). These screws  
secure the back box to the internal panel casing.  
DO NOT  
REMOVE  
DO NOT REMOVE  
these panel  
securing screws  
these  
panel  
securing  
screws  
Unscrew these four Housing Screws  
to remove the back box. These make direct  
contact with the black outer housing.  
FIG. 32 Location of the attachment screws on the NXD back box  
DO NOT REMOVE THE FOUR PANEL SECURING SCREWS. These screws secure  
the LCD to the metallic casing underneath.  
7. Lift the back box housing to separate it from the internal panel casing.  
Installing the MP-TP12 Back Box  
1. Unscrew the four pan-head Housing screws (#8-32) from the MP-TP12 rear plastic cover.  
2. Gently place the MP-TP12 back box over the internal panel casing (with the cable routing hole on  
the right-side of the panel).  
3. Re-install and secure the four pan-head Housing Screws into their pre-drilled holes along the edges  
of the MB-TP12 back box (FIG. 33) and secure them using a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver.  
4. Place the I/O connector plate back over the connector opening and align the connector locations.  
5. Resecure the I/O connector plate (using a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver) and resecure the  
Stereo Output nut on the Stereo Output jack.  
34  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
DO NOT REMOVE  
Twelve  
#6-32  
securing  
screws  
MB-TP12 back box  
Connector  
Opening  
Strain relief grommet (Clip facing up)  
Rim of the strain relief grommet  
should lie flush against enclosure  
Securing  
hole locations  
(3 on each side)  
Internal panel casing  
Four (pan-head) Housing Screws  
Rear plastic cover  
Four (#8-32) screws  
FIG. 33 Location of the attachment screws on the NXD back box and VESA housing  
Cable Installation for the MP-TP12 Back Box  
1. Connect the cable connectors (RJ-45, Ethernet, and any other audio/video wiring) to their respective  
locations along the side of the touch panel.  
2. Thread the incoming cables through the strain relief grommet opening on the rear plastic cover  
Finalizing the installation  
1. Gently place the rear plastic cover over the NXD panel (with LCD and MB-TP12 back box).  
2. Insert the protruding cables, coming out from the opening on the rear plastic cover, into the open  
strain relief grommet.  
3. Allow some slack/length on these cables as a service loop. This service loop provides enough cable  
length so you can later remove the NXD (with connected cables) from the rear plastic cover.  
VERIFY THE LENGTH AND LOCATION OF THE INSERTED CABLES. ONCE THE  
STRAIN RELIEF GROMMET IS CLOSED, IT IS DIFFICULT TO RE-OPEN.  
4. Carefully apply pressure to close the strain relief grommet over the desired cable location.  
35  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
Verify the Strain Relief Grommet is securely closed over the cables and the clip is  
facing the correct direction (upwards). The process of securing the strain relief  
grommet may require the use of pliers. Also verify the length and location of the  
inserted cables. Once the strain relief grommet is closed, it is difficult to re-open.  
5. Firmly push the Strain Relief Grommet into the opening (toward the inside) until the rim is securely  
flush against the back of the rear plastic cover (FIG. 33).  
6. Securely grasp both sides of the NXD panel (with LCD, MB-TP12 back box, and attached cables),  
rotate the entire unit over, and lie it on a flat level surface.  
7. Note the available mounting contact surface area on the rear plastic cover of the MB-TP12  
(FIG. 34). This area represents the space available for use with a VESA connector plate.  
.80[20MM]  
2.52[64MM]  
2.61[66MM]  
3.55[90MM]  
FIG. 34 MB-TP12 Mounting contact surface area  
8. Insert and secure the twelve #6-32 securing screws into their pre-drilled holes along the edges of the  
NXD unit (FIG. 33). This step secures the NXD unit to the rim of the rear plastic cover.  
9. Align a VESA mount connector (purchased separately) to the four #8-32 screw holes on the back of  
the rear plastic cover (FIG. 33).  
10. Insert the four provided #8-32 screws through the VESA mount’s four holes and then into the  
pre-drilled holes on the rear plastic cover.  
When installing a VESA mount to the rear plastic cover, use only the AMX provided  
#8-32 screws.  
11. Secure these four #8-32 screws to the rear plastic cover by using a grounded Phillips-head  
screwdriver. This step secures the VESA mount to the rear of the panel.  
Refer to your particular VESA mount manufacturer’s installation procedures for further surface  
mounting procedures.  
36  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
Rear plastic cover (rear view)  
Rim of the strain relief grommet  
should lie flush against enclosure  
CLIP FACING UP  
VESA mount connection location  
(USE ONLY AMX PROVIDED #8-32 screws)  
FIG. 35 Installation of grommet into the rear plastic enclosure  
Pre-wall Installation of the Conduit Box  
Wall Mount panels (NXDs) are contained within a metallic outer housing (back box). This back box is  
not removed when installing the NXD into a conduit box (CB-TP12). The back box is only removed to  
either gain access for the replacement of the Memory/Compact Flash or upgrade the unit with an MB-TP  
Universal VESA Mounting Kit.  
INSTALLER: LEAVE A GAP BETWEEN THE STUD AND CONDUIT BOX TO  
ACCOMMODATE THE DRYWALL SHEETROCK. This gap allows the installation of  
the drywall/sheetrock after the conduit box has been installed.  
The CB-TP12 conduit wallbox is an optional metallic box that is secured onto stud beams prior to the  
installation of a solid surface. Installation procedures and configurations can vary. This section describes  
the installation procedures for the most common installation scenario.  
1. Fasten the CB-TP12 to a stud through the stud fastening holes, located on the inside of the conduit  
box (FIG. 36), by using either nails or screws.  
2. Remove any necessary wiring knockouts from the (optional) conduit box (C in FIG. 36) where the  
necessary cables are threaded through for connection to the touch panel.  
3. Thread the incoming RJ-45, Ethernet, and any other audio/video wiring through the knockouts.  
Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for the 1200V Panels section on page 45 for pinout descriptions.  
Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re-positioning of the panel.  
4. Install the drywall/sheetrock before inserting the main NXD unit into the CB-TP12.  
37  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
Stud  
Knockouts should be located on the left-side of the  
conduit box, alongside the connectors  
Drywall/  
sheetrock  
CB-TP Conduit Wallbox  
Stud fastening holes  
Use the four #4-40  
Mounting Screws to  
secure the NXD to the  
conduit box at these  
locations  
Mounting tabs  
for NXD panel should  
be flush with the outside of the sheetrock  
FIG. 36 Screw locations for conduit box attachment in a pre-wall installation  
Installation of the NXD Touch Panel  
The NXD panel can be installed either directly into the (optional) CB-TP12 or other solid surface  
environment using the two different mounting options: drywall clips or solid surface screws. The  
following sections describe mounting the touch panel directly into a pre-wall installed conduit box, a  
solid surface or drywall, and optional NXA-RK Rack Mount Kit.  
Installing the NXD panel within a Conduit Box  
The conduit box must be mounted prior to continuing this section. Refer to the procedures in the  
instructions. Verify that all necessary cables have been threaded through the knockouts on the conduit  
box and the connections have been tested prior to installation of the NXD panel.  
1. Remove the magnetic faceplate/bezel (A in FIG. 37) from the main NXD unit (B in FIG. 37) by  
gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force.  
2. Verify the incoming RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any other audio/video cables have been properly  
threaded through the wiring knockouts (from their terminal locations) on the conduit box.  
Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re-positioning of the panel.  
3. Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side of the  
(un-powered) NXD touch panel.  
Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power supply before plugging  
in the 2-pin power connector.  
The USB connectors can be from either a USB extension cable, or a wireless USB RF  
transmitter.  
4. Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and  
applying power. Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent repetition  
of the installation.  
5. Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected power supply.  
38  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
Stud  
Cable  
knockouts  
C - Optional CB-TP  
conduit/wallbox  
Mounting Tab  
Install the four #4-40  
screws into the places  
indicated  
Installed flush  
against the  
finished wall  
surface  
SURFACE  
Do not use these  
tabs to mount  
the conduit /wallbox  
These are ONLY used to  
secure the main unit to the CB  
B - Main NXD unit consists of  
the touch panel and backbox housing  
A - Faceplate  
(bezel)  
FIG. 37 Wall Mount panel installation configuration for pre-existing conduit/wallbox in a pre-wall construction  
Don’t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel. The unit must be installed with  
the attached connectors before being inserted into the conduit box.  
6. Carefully slide the main unit (B in FIG. 37) into the conduit box, so the Mounting Tabs lie flush  
against the conduit box (C in FIG. 37).  
7. Insert and secure the four securing #4-40 Mounting Screws into their corresponding holes located  
along the sides of the NXD (FIG. 36 and FIG. 37).  
8. Place the magnetic faceplate (A in FIG. 37) back onto the main NXD unit (B in FIG. 37).  
Make sure to align the Microphone, Light, and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective  
openings on the front bezel/faceplate.  
9. Reconnect the terminal RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any optional audio/video wiring to their  
respective locations (outside the conduit box) on either the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box,  
Ethernet port, or NetLinx Master.  
10. Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC-compliant power supply and apply power.  
39  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
Installing the NXD into drywall using Expansion Clips  
Expansion clips are mounted through the four oval holes located at the top and bottom of the panel. As  
the screw is tightened, the clip bends toward the insertion hole and into the wall. This bending creates a  
"grip" on the wall by either pressing onto the wall or by securing the drywall between the housing and  
the drywall clip.  
The most important thing to remember when mounting the NXD is that the outer frame (Mounting Tabs)  
must be installed flush against the mounting surface.  
1. Prepare the area by removing any screws or nails from the drywall before beginning the cutout  
process.  
2. Cut out the surface for the 12-inch Wall Mount using the dimensions shown in FIG. 38. Be sure to  
cut out the four notches along the top and bottom areas to accommodate the four drywall expansion  
clips (provided).  
CUTOUT  
FRONT BEZEL  
FIG. 38 NXD-1200V 12-inch Wall Mount panel dimensions using expansion clips  
3. Remove the magnetic faceplate/bezel (A in FIG. 39) from the main NXD unit (B in FIG. 39) by  
gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force.  
40  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
4 notches are  
required if the  
unit is installed in  
drywall using the  
four (4) provided  
drywall expansion  
clips  
Install the four drywall  
clip sets (included)  
into these holes  
Mounting Tab  
B - Main NXD unit consists of  
the touch panel and housing  
A - Faceplate  
(bezel)  
FIG. 39 Wall Mount panel (NXD) installation configuration for drywall surfaces  
4. Thread the incoming RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any other audio/video wiring (from their terminal  
locations) through the cutout opening. Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for the 1200V Panels section  
on page 45 for pinout descriptions.  
Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re-positioning of the panel.  
5. Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side of the  
(un-powered) NXD touch panel.  
Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power supply before plugging  
in the 2-pin power connector.  
The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable, or a wireless USB RF  
transmitter.  
6. Test the incoming wiring by attaching the panel connections to their terminal locations and applying  
power. Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent repetition of the  
installation.  
7. Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected power supply.  
Don’t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel. The unit must be installed with  
the attached connectors before being inserted into the drywall.  
8. Insert the four sets of drywall screws and expansion clips into the four oval notch locations along  
the top/bottom edges of the main unit (FIG. 39).  
9. Carefully insert the main unit (with expansion clips) into the cutout until the Mounting Tabs on the  
NXD unit lie flush against the wall (FIG. 39).  
10. Tighten the drywall clip sets (screws and clips) until the Mounting Tabs are securely fastened and  
flush against the wall.  
41  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
The drywall clip set must be re-ordered from AMX if the drywall clip is bent  
accidentally during an installation or removed during a re-installation.  
11. Place the magnetic faceplate (A in FIG. 39) back onto the main NXD unit (B in FIG. 39).  
Make sure to align the Microphone, Light, and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective  
openings on the front bezel/faceplate.  
12. Reconnect the terminal RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any optional audio/video wiring to their  
respective locations on either the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box, Ethernet port, or NetLinx  
Master.  
13. Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC-compliant power supply and apply power.  
Installing the NXD into a Flat Surface using #4 screws  
Mounting screws (#4, not included) are secured through circular holes located at the left and right sides  
of the NXD panel. The most important thing to remember when mounting the NXD is that the  
outer frame (Mounting Tabs) must be installed flush against the mounting surface.  
It is recommended that you cutout the surface slightly smaller than what is outlined in the  
installation drawings so that you can make any necessary cutout adjustments.  
1. Prepare the area by removing any screws or nails from the surface before beginning the cutout  
process.  
2. Cut out the surface for the 12-inch Wall Mount using the dimensions shown in FIG. 40.  
THESE 4 HOLES ARE ONLY REQUIRED  
WHEN MOUNTING UNIT TO A SOLID  
SURFACE (PODIUM, DESK, ETC.).  
SECURE UNIT WITH #4 SCREWS.  
CUTOUT  
FRONT BEZEL  
FIG. 40 NXD-1200V Wall Mount panel dimensions using #4 mounting screws  
3. Remove the magnetic faceplate/bezel (A in FIG. 41) from the main NXD unit (B in FIG. 41) by  
gripping the faceplate and pulling with gentle outward force.  
42  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
Attachment is done  
along the edges of  
the cutout  
Flat surface  
(can include a  
wall, podium, or  
other flat  
Install the four (#4)  
surface)  
mounting screws  
into the holes  
(screws not included)  
B - Main NXD unit consists of  
A - Faceplate  
the touch panel and housing  
(bezel)  
FIG. 41 Wall Mount panel installation configuration for flat/solid surfaces  
4. Thread the incoming RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any other audio/video wiring (from their terminal  
locations) through the cutout opening. Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for the 1200V Panels section  
on page 45 for pinout descriptions.  
Leave enough slack in the wiring to accommodate any re-positioning of the panel.  
5. Connect all data and power wiring to their corresponding locations along the side of the  
(un-powered) NXD touch panel.  
Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to power supply before plugging in  
the 2-pin power connector.  
The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable, or a wireless USB RF  
transmitter.  
6. Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and  
applying power. Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly before finalizing the  
installation.  
7. Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the power supply.  
Don’t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel. The unit must be installed with  
the necessary connectors before being inserted into the solid surface.  
8. Carefully slide the main unit into the cutout until the Mounting Tabs of the NXD unit lie flush  
against the wall.  
9. Insert and secure the four #4 screws into their corresponding holes located along the sides of the  
NXD (using a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver) until the unit is secure and flush against the wall.  
43  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
10. Place the magnetic faceplate (A in FIG. 41) back onto the main NXD unit (B in FIG. 41).  
Make sure to align the Microphone, Light, and PIR Motion sensor locations to their respective  
openings on the front bezel/faceplate.  
11. Reconnect the terminal RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any optional audio/video wiring to their  
respective locations on either the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box, Ethernet port, or NetLinx  
Master.  
12. Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC-compliant power supply and apply power.  
Installing an NXD into an (optional) Rack Mount Kit (NXA-RK12)  
1. Remove the magnetic faceplate/bezel from the main NXD unit by gripping the faceplate and pulling  
with gentle outward force.  
2. Thread the incoming RJ-45, Ethernet, USB, and any optional audio/video wiring through the  
opening in the equipment rack (from their terminal locations). Refer to the Wiring Guidelines for  
the 1200V Panels section on page 45 for pinout descriptions. Leave enough slack to accommodate  
any re-positioning of the panel.  
3. Connect all data and power wiring connectors to their corresponding locations along the side of the  
(un-powered) NXD touch panel.  
Verify the terminal end of the power cable is not connected to a power supply before plugging  
in the 2-pin power connector.  
The USB connectors can be from a either a USB extension cable, or a wireless USB RF  
transmitter.  
4. Test the incoming wiring by connecting the panel connections to their terminal locations and  
applying power. Verify the panel is receiving power and functioning properly to prevent repetition  
of the installation.  
5. Disconnect the terminal end of the power cable from the connected power supply.  
Don’t disconnect the connectors from the touch panel. The unit must be installed with  
the necessary connectors before being inserted into the equipment rack.  
6. Insert the main 12-inch Modero unit into an NXA-RK12 (FIG. 42).  
Faceplate  
Rack mount  
frame (NXA-RK12)  
FIG. 42 NXD-1200V 12 inch Wall Mount panel installed into an NXA-RK12 Rack Mount Kit  
44  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
7. Secure the panel to the NXA-RK frame by first inserting and then tightening the four #4-40 screws  
(provided). Line up the four mounting holes and use a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver to tighten  
the screws in a clockwise direction.  
8. Insert the NXA-RK (with connected NXD unit) into the equipment rack, making sure to align the  
screw holes along the sides on the NXA-RK with the holes in the equipment rack.  
9. Use a grounded Phillips-head screwdriver to secure the NXA-RK (with connected NXD unit) to the  
equipment rack using #10-32 screws (not included).  
10. Place the magnet faceplate back onto the main NXD unit by gripping the faceplate and placing it on  
the housing with gentle force. Make sure to align the Microphone, Light, and PIR Motion sensor  
locations to their respective openings on the front bezel/faceplate.  
11. Reconnect the terminal RJ-45, Ethernet, and any optional audio/video wiring to their respective  
locations on either the NXA-AVB/ETHERNET Breakout Box, Ethernet port, or NetLinx Master.  
12. Reconnect the terminal power connector on the 12 VDC-compliant power supply and apply power.  
Wiring Guidelines for the 1200V Panels  
These panels require the use of a 12 VDC-compliant power supply to provide power to the panel via the  
2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix PWR connector. Use the previously referenced power requirements  
information to determine the power draw.  
The incoming PWR and GND wires from the power supply must be connected to the corresponding  
locations within the PWR connector.  
These units should only have one source of incoming power. Using more than one  
source of power to the touch panel can result in damage to the internal components  
and a possible burn out.  
Apply power to the panels only after installation is complete.  
Preparing captive wires  
You will need a wire stripper and flat-blade screwdriver to prepare and connect the captive wires.  
Never pre-tin wires for compression-type connections.  
1. Strip 0.25 inch (6.35 mm) of insulation off all wires.  
2. Insert each wire into the appropriate opening on the connector (according to the wiring diagrams  
and connector types described in this section).  
3. Tighten the screws to secure the wire in the connector. Do not tighten the screws excessively; doing  
so may strip the threads and damage the connector.  
45  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
Wiring a power connection  
To use the 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix connector with a 12 VDC-compliant power supply, the incoming  
PWR and GND wires from the external source must be connected to their corresponding locations on the  
connector (FIG. 43).  
PWR +  
Power Supply  
GND -  
To the Touch Panel  
FIG. 43 NetLinx power connector wiring diagram  
1. Insert the PWR and GND wires on the terminal end of the 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix cable.  
Match the wiring locations of the +/- on both the power supply and the terminal connector.  
2. Tighten the clamp to secure the two wires. Do not tighten the screws excessively; doing so may strip  
the threads and damage the connector.  
3. Verify the connection of the 2-pin 3.5 mm mini-Phoenix to the power supply.  
Audio/Video Port: Connections and Wiring  
The following table shows the signal and pinout/pairing information used on the RJ-45 Audio and Video  
connections.  
Audio/Video RJ-45 Pinout Information  
Pin  
1
Wire Color  
Orange/White  
Orange  
Function  
Right Audio In  
Right Audio In  
Video In  
Polarity  
+
-
2
3
Green/White  
Blue  
-
4
Mic Out  
-
5
White/Blue  
Green  
Mic Out  
+
+
+
-
6
Video In  
7
White/Brown  
Brown  
Left Audio In  
Left Audio In  
TIA 568B  
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
(female)  
(male)  
RJ-45 connector - pin configurations  
Refer to the Installing CAT5 Suppression Ferrites section on page 14 for detailed information on how to  
install the necessary number of CAT5 Suppression Ferrites on the Black A/V RJ-45 cable connected to  
the panel.  
46  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
Ethernet/RJ-45 Port: Connections and Wiring  
FIG. 44 describes the blink activity for the Ethernet 10/100 Base-T RJ-45 connector and cable. The  
Ethernet cable is connected to the side of the Wall Mount panels  
A - Activity LED (yellow)  
lights when receiving or  
transmitting Ethernet  
data packets  
L - Link LED (green) lights when  
the Ethernet cables are connected  
and terminated correctly.  
A
L
ETHERNET  
10/100  
FIG. 44 Layout of Ethernet LEDs  
The following table lists the pinouts, signals, and pairing associated with the Ethernet connector.  
Ethernet RJ-45 Pinouts and Signals  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
Pin  
1
Signals  
TX +  
Connections Pairing  
Color  
1 --------- 1  
2 --------- 2  
3 --------- 3  
1 --------- 2  
Orange-White  
Orange  
2
TX -  
3
RX +  
3 --------- 6  
Green-White  
Blue  
4
no connection 4 --------- 4  
no connection 5 --------- 5  
5
Blue-White  
Green  
6
RX -  
6 --------- 6  
7
no connection 7 --------- 7  
no connection 8 --------- 8  
Brown-White  
Brown  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8  
8
FIG. 45 diagrams the RJ-45 pinouts and signals for the Ethernet RJ-45 connector and cable.  
FIG. 45 RJ-45 wiring diagram  
47  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Installation Procedures: NXD-1200V Panels  
48  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Panel Calibration  
Panel Calibration  
This section outlines the steps for calibrating the touch panel. It is recommended that you calibrate the  
panel before its initial use and after completing a firmware download.  
Modero panels are factory setup with specific demo touch panel pages. The first splash screen that  
appears indicates the panel is receiving power, beginning to load firmware, and preparing to display the  
default touch panel pages. When the panel is ready, the AMX Splash Screen is replaced by the Initial  
Panel Page (FIG. 46).  
AMX Splash Screen  
(appears during power-up)  
Initial Panel Page  
(AMX Logo Page)  
FIG. 46 AMX splash screen and initial Panel Page  
Calibrating the Modero Panel  
1. Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (FIG. 47) for 6 seconds (passing-over the Setup  
page) to access the Calibration setup page (FIG. 48). The panel should first be calibrated properly.  
Front Setup  
Access button (grey)  
- 3 second press/hold:  
Accesses the Setup page  
- 6 second press/hold:  
Accesses the Calibration  
page  
Single press puts  
the panel to sleep  
FIG. 47 Location of grey Front Setup Access button  
49  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
         
Panel Calibration  
2. Press the crosshairs (on the Calibration page) to set the calibration points on the LCD (FIG. 48).  
The request to touch the crosshairs  
is the first on-screen message  
Calibration successful is the second  
on-screen message that appears  
after the calibration process is  
completed  
On-screen crosshairs used for  
calibration of the touch device  
FIG. 48 Touch Panel Calibration Screens  
3. After the "Calibration Successful.." message appears, press anywhere on the screen to continue and  
return to the Setup page.  
If the calibration was improperly set and you cannot return to the Calibration  
page (through the panel’s firmware); you can access this firmware page via  
G4 WebControl where you can navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the  
Calibrate button through your VNC window.  
This action causes the panel to go to the Calibration page seen above, where you  
can physically recalibrate the actual touch panel again using the above procedures.  
Testing your Calibration  
1. Press and hold down the on-screen Calibration button for 6 seconds to enter the Calibration Test  
page (FIG. 49).  
On-screen crosshairs is used to  
verify a proper calibration of the  
panel  
FIG. 49 Calibration Test page  
2. Press anywhere on this page to confirm the on-screen crosshairs match your touch points.  
3. If the crosshairs do not appear directly below your LCD touch points, press the Back button and  
recalibrate the panel using the above steps.  
4. Exit this Calibration Test page by pressing the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page.  
50  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
Configuring Communication  
Communication between the Modero panel and the Master is done using either USB or ETHERNET  
(DHCP or Static IP). Ethernet communication can be achieved through either a direct connection  
(Ethernet) or through the use of the optional NXA-PCI80211G wireless interface card.  
USB input devices must be plugged into the rear or side USB connectors before the  
G4 panel is powered-up. The panel will not detect a USB connection of this type until  
after the unit cycles power.  
Before commencing, verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master and Modero panel  
firmware. Verify you are using the latest versions of AMX’s NetLinx Studio and  
TPDesign4 programs.  
Modero Setup and System Connection  
1. Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page (FIG. 50).  
Connection Status  
Red Connection Status icon -  
indicates no connection to a Master  
Green Connection Status icon -  
indicates communication to a Master  
Yellow Connection Status icon -  
indicates an unreliable network  
connection  
Battery Base button doesn’t appear  
until NXT is connected to a BASE/B  
FIG. 50 Setup page  
2. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the Protected  
Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
3. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field and press Done when finished.  
Clearing Password #5, from the initial Password Setup page, removes the need for  
you to enter the default password before accessing the Protected Setup page.  
4. Press the red Device Number field to open the Device Number keypad (FIG. 51).  
5. Enter a Device Number value for the panel into the Device Number Keypad.  
The default is 10001 and the range is from 1 - 32000.  
When using multiple panels within a NetLinx System, remember to assign unique  
Device Number values to each panel so that all assigned panels appear in the  
System listing for the target Master.  
6. Press Done to close the keypad, assign the number, and return to the Protected Setup page.  
51  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Configuring Communication  
FIG. 51 Protected Setup page  
7. Press the on-screen Reboot button to restart the panel and incorporate any changes.  
Before continuing, open NetLinx Studio 2.x. This program assists in developing a  
System Number, Master IP/URL, and Master Port number. Refer to your NetLinx  
Master’s instruction manuals for more information.  
8. Obtain the System Number and Master IP Address from NetLinx Studio. This information must be  
specific for the system used with the configured Modero panel.  
9. Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page.  
10. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the Protected  
Setup page.  
11. Press the System Settings button (located on the Protected Setup page) to open the System Settings  
page (FIG. 52) and begin configuring the communication settings on the panel to match those of the  
target Master.  
Modero  
connection  
information  
NetLinx Master’s  
connection  
information  
MAC Address  
from panel is  
factory set to a  
unique address  
FIG. 52 System Settings page  
There are 2 possible Master Connection Types available: USB or Ethernet.  
A USB connection type is a direct connection from the panel’s mini-USB port to a  
corresponding USB port on the PC (acting as a Virtual Master).  
An Ethernet connection type involves indirect communication from the panel to a  
Master via an Ethernet connection to the network.  
52  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Configuring Communication  
It is recommended that firmware KIT files only be transferred over a direct connection  
and only when the panel is connected to a power supply. If battery power or wireless  
connection fails during a firmware upgrade, the panel flash file system may become  
corrupted.  
The mini-USB connector MUST be plugged into an already active panel before the  
PC can recognize the connection and assign an appropriate USB driver. This driver is  
part of the latest TPDesign4 software application installation.  
Configuring and Using USB with a Virtual Master  
NetLinx Studio can be setup to run a Virtual Master where the PC acts as the Master by supplying its  
own IP Address for communication to the panel. The PC is first equipped with the USB driver, the panel  
is then configured for USB communication, and then Studio is configured to act as the Master.  
For a personal computer to establish a connection to a Modero panel via USB, the target computer must  
have the appropriate AMX USB driver installed. This installation is bundled into the latest TPDesign4  
software setup process or can be downloaded independently from the main Application Files page on  
www.amx.com.  
Step 1: Setting up the Panel and PC for USB Communication  
1. If you do not currently have the latest version of TPDesign4, navigate to www.amx.com > Tech  
Center > Downloadable Files > Application Files > NetLinx Design Tools section of the website  
and locate the AMX USB Driver executable (AMX USBLAN Setup exe).  
2. Download this executable file to a known location on your computer.  
3. Launch the file by double-clicking on it and follow the on-screen prompts to complete your  
installation. Note that even if you have loaded the latest AMX Studio or TPD4 software, you will  
still need to download and install this file if you are working with either the 1200V-Series or  
VG-Series of panels.  
4. Choose the default language, agree to the Licensing information, and choose the location for the file  
installations (C:\Program Files\AMX\USBLAN).  
5. From within the Choose Components dialog, select the features you wish to install. The Driver  
option is selected by default and is the only item required.  
6. Click the Install button to continue with the installation.  
7. Once the application begins the installation of the corresponding USB driver files, it may encounter  
cases where previous versions of these files already exist. This can occur if you have previously  
installed released versions of NetLinx Studio and TPDesign4.  
If you are prompted to replace the AXBLAN.INF file, select YES.  
If you are prompted to replace the Checked driver file, select NO.  
If you are prompted to replace the AXBLAN.SYS and AXFILT.SYS files, select Yes.  
8. Continue the setup process by following these OS-related processes:  
For machines running Windows 2000 simply click the Next button when the installation is  
complete. Creating a restore point is not an available option in 2000.  
For Windows XP machines the setup program asks if you would like to create a restore point.  
It is always a good idea to create restore points prior to installing new software.  
Click the Next button when done.  
9. At the end of the installation, press the Finish button.  
53  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Configuring Communication  
Step 2: Confirming the Installation of the USB Driver on the PC  
The first time each AMX touch panel is connected to the PC it is detected as a new hardware device and  
the USBLAN driver becomes associated with it (panel specific). Each time thereafter the panel is  
"recognized" as a unique USBLAN device and the association to the driver is done in the background.  
When the panel is detected for the first time some user intervention is required during the association  
between panel and driver.  
1. After the installation of the USB driver has been completed, confirm the proper installation of the  
large Type-A USB connector to the PC's USB port, and restart your machine.  
If the panel is already powered, continue with steps 3.  
The panel MUST be powered and configured for USB communication before  
connecting the mini-USB connector to the panel’s Program Port.  
2. Connect the terminal end of the 12 VDC-compliant power supply cable to the power connector on  
the rear/side of the touch panel and then apply power.  
3. After the panel powers-up, press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (for 3 seconds) to  
continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page.  
4. Select Protected Setup > System Settings (located on the lower-left) to open the System Settings  
page (FIG. 53).  
No connection is established until  
the Virtual Master becomes  
active within Studio  
Yellow Connection Status icon -  
indicates an unreliable network  
connection  
Red Connection Status icon -  
indicates no connection to a Master  
Green Connection Status icon -  
indicates communication to a Master  
FIG. 53 System Settings page - using a USB Connection Type  
5. Toggle the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to USB.  
Refer to the System Settings Page section on page 118 for more information about the fields on this  
page.  
ALL fields are then greyed-out and read-only, but still display any previous network  
information.  
6. Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page.  
7. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel. Remember that  
the panel’s connection type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to inserting  
the USB connector.  
54  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
8. ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page, THEN insert the mini-USB connector into  
the Program Port on the panel. It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new connection and  
send a signal to the PC (indicated by a green System Connection icon). If this is your first time  
installing the USB driver, a USB driver installation popup window (FIG. 54) then appears on the  
screen.  
FIG. 54 USB driver installation popup window  
This window notifies you that the panel has been detected by the PC as a USB-compliant  
device and the PC is installing an appropriate USB driver to establish a proper communication  
to the panel.  
The driver does not contain a Microsoft® digital signature and Windows® then informs you of  
such.  
9. Click Yes when told that a digital signature was not found. This action accepts the installation of the  
new USB driver. The panel is now configured to communicate directly with the PC.  
This process completes the association between driver and device.  
Each time the same touch panel is connected to the computer the driver is automatically  
loaded (using a unique name - example USB LAN LINK #1, #2).  
Each time a different touch panel is connected to the computer, the previous procedures  
will need to be repeated.  
The previous version of the AMX USBLAN driver showed a USB connection icon in the  
system tray when a panel was connected. The new version of the driver does not show an  
icon in the System Tray.  
A Virtual NetLinx Master (VNM) is used when the target panel is not connected to a  
physical NetLinx Master. In this situation, the PC takes on the functions of a Master  
via a Virtual NetLinx Master. This connection is made by either using the PC’s  
Ethernet Address (via TCP/IP using a known PC’s IP Address as the Master) or  
using a direct mini-USB connection to communicate directly to the panel.  
10. Navigate back to the System Settings page.  
55  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Configuring Communication  
Step 3: Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections  
1. Navigate to Start > Settings > Control Panel > and double-click the System icon to launch the  
System Properties dialog.  
2. Select the Hardware tab and click on the Device Manager button to launch the Device Manager  
dialog.  
Within the Device Manager dialog, the AMX USBLAN device appears under Network  
Adapters (FIG. 55) and has a unique name such as AMX USB LAN LINK #2. The number  
changes depending on which recognized panel is currently connected.  
USB connected touch  
panel (showing the  
recognized panel)  
FIG. 55 Device Manager dialog showing USB device  
To remove the USB driver association from a previously connected touch panel, you must navigate  
back to the Device Manager, right-click on the panel’s USB driver (example AMX USB LAN LINK #2)  
and select Uninstall from the context menu and then OK.  
Once the system completes the removal of the device, the Device Manager window will  
refresh, and the device will no longer appear.  
The next time this device is connected to the computer it will appear as a new hardware device  
and will need to be associated again with the driver (refer to Step 2: Confirming the  
Step 4: Using a USB to Configure a Virtual Master (using NetLinx Studio)  
When configuring your panel to communicate via USB with a Virtual Master (on your  
PC), ONLY the USB connection option must be selected within the Type field. Since  
this is a direct connection, the PC’s IP Address is not needed.  
Before beginning:  
1. Verify the panel has been configured to communicate via USB within the System Settings page and  
that the USB driver has been properly configured. Refer to the previous section for more  
information.  
2. Launch NetLinx Studio 2.x (default location is Start > Programs > AMX Control Disc > NetLinx  
Studio 2 > NetLinx Studio 2).  
3. Select Settings > Master Communication Settings, from the Main menu to open the Master  
Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 56).  
4. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog.  
56  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
IP Address of computer  
(not needed as this is a direct  
USB connection)  
FIG. 56 Assigning Communication Settings for a Virtual Master  
5. Click on the NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section) to indicate that you  
are working as a NetLinx Master.  
6. Click on the Virtual Master radio box (from the Transport Connection Option section) to indicate  
you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate directly with a panel. Everything else such as  
the Authentication is greyed-out because you are not going through the Master’s UI.  
7. Click the Edit Settings button (on the Communications Settings dialog) to open the Virtual NetLinx  
Master Settings dialog (FIG. 56).  
8. From within this dialog enter the System number (default is 1).  
9. Click OK three times to close the open dialogs, save your settings, and return to the main NetLinx  
Studio application.  
10. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System.  
The default System value is one.  
11. Right-click on the Empty Device Tree/System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate the  
list.  
The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number (in the Online Tree tab)  
until both the system number used in step 7 for the VNM is entered into the Master Connection  
section of the System Settings page and the panel is restarted.  
The Connection status turns green after a few seconds to indicate an active USB connection to  
the PC (Virtual Master). No Lock icon is displayed because this USB connection is not  
secured (requiring a username/password).  
If a few minutes have gone by and the System Settings icon still does not turn green, repeat the  
USB connection and Virtual Master setup procedures (outlined in this section). Refreshing the  
System sends out a request to the panel to respond and completes the communication (turning  
the System Connection icon green).  
57  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Step 5: Confirm and View the current AMX USB device connections  
Use the CC-USB Type-A to Mini-B 5-wire programming cable (FG10-5965) to provide communication  
between the mini-USB Program port on the touch panel and the PC. This method of communication is  
used to transfer firmware KIT files and TPD4 touch panel files.  
A mini-USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active panel.  
Connection to a previously powered panel which then reboots, allows the PC to  
detect the panel and assign an appropriate USB driver.  
1. Verify this direct USB connection (Type-A on the panel to mini-USB on the panel) is configured  
properly using the steps outlined in the previous two sections.  
2. With the panel already configured for USB communication and the Virtual Master setup within  
NetLinx Studio, its now time to verify the panel is ready to receive files.  
3. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System.  
The default System value is one.  
4. Right-click on the System entry (A in FIG. 57) and select Refresh System. This causes a refresh of  
all project systems, establishes a new connection to the Virtual Master, and populates the System list  
with devices on your particular system.  
A
B
FIG. 57 Using USB for Virtual Master communication  
58  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Configuring Communication  
Wireless Settings Page - Wireless Access Overview  
IP Routing  
The behavior of the wireless routing is largely dependent on the wired network interface. Although the  
panel can be connected to two networks simultaneously it may only have one gateway. If the wired  
network was successfully set up and a gateway was obtained; then the default route for all network traffic  
will be via the wired network. In the event that the wired network was not configured, then the default  
route for all network traffic will be via the wireless network. The wired network connection always takes  
priority.  
As an example:  
Imagine a panel connected to two networks A & B. A is the wired network and B is the  
wireless network. If the Master controller is on either of these networks then it will be  
reached. However if the Master controller is on a different network, C, then determining  
which network interface (wired or wireless) that will be used is dependent on the gateway.  
Hot Swapping  
Hot swapping is not an issue on these panels as the card is installed within the unit and cannot be  
removed without first removing the housing.  
In the case of DHCP, there must be a DHCP server accessible before the fields are populated.  
If the SSID (Network Name) and WEP fields have not previously been configured, the  
Wireless Settings page will not work until the panel is rebooted.  
Ethernet Communication from the panel can be direct (using an Ethernet cable) or indirect (through the  
NXA-PCI80211G AMX Wireless Card (FG2255-04) communicating to a Wireless Access Point (WAP)  
such as the NXA-WAP200G). In determining the Ethernet method of communication, the panel will  
always default first to the direct Ethernet communication. If no direct connection is detected, the panel  
will first check to see if there is an installed wireless interface card and then communicate to the WAP  
using the Wireless Settings assigned within the Wireless Settings page. The WAP communication  
parameters must match those of the pre-installed wireless interface card installed within the panel.  
Wireless Access Points are the cornerstone of any wireless network. A Wireless Access Point  
acts as a bridge between a wired and wireless network. It aggregates the traffic from all the  
wireless clients and forwards it down the network to the switch or router. One Wireless  
Access Point may be all you need. However, you could need more Wireless Access Points  
depending on either how large your installation is, how it is laid out, and how it is constructed.  
Wireless Equivalent Privacy (WEP) Security is a method by which WLANs protect wireless  
data streams. A data stream encrypted with WEP can still be intercepted or eavesdropped  
upon, but the encryption makes the data unintelligible to the interloper. The strength of WEP  
is measured by the length of the key used to encrypt the data. The longer the key, the harder it  
is to crack.  
802.11b implementations provided 40-bit and 104-bit WEP keys. This is known respectively  
as 64-bit and 128-bit WEP encryption. 64-bit is generally not regarded as adequate security  
protection. Both key lengths are supported by the Modero product line. Whichever level of  
WEP you use, it's crucial to use identical settings (CASE SENSITIVE)--the key length, and  
the key itself-- on all devices. Only devices with common WEP settings will be able to  
communicate. Similarly, if one device has WEP enabled and another doesn't, they won't be  
able to talk to each other.  
59  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
       
Configuring Communication  
Although the calculations required to encrypt data with WEP can impact the performance of  
your wireless network, it's generally seen only when running benchmarks, and not large  
enough to be noticeable in the course of normal network usage.  
Configuring a Wireless Connection  
When working with a wireless card, the first step is to configure wireless communication parameters  
within the Wireless Settings page. This page only configures the card to communicate to a target WAP  
(such as the NXA-WAP200G), it is still necessary to tell the panel which Master it should be  
communicating with. This "pointing to a Master" is done via the System Settings page where you  
configure the IP Address, System Number and Username/Password information assigned to the target  
Master.  
Step 1: Configuring the Panel’s Wireless IP Settings  
The first step to successfully setting up your wireless card is to configure the IP Settings section of the  
Wireless Settings page. The section configures the communication parameters from the Modero panel to  
the web.  
Wireless communication using a DHCP Address  
1. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the Protected  
Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
2. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field and press Done when finished.  
3. Press the Wireless Settings button (located on the lower-left) to open the Wireless Settings page.  
Wireless communication is set within the IP Settings section of this page (FIG. 58).  
4. Toggle the DHCP/Static field (from the IP Settings section) until the choice cycles to DHCP.  
This action causes all fields in the IP Settings section (other than Host Name) to be greyed-out.  
DHCP will register the unique MAC Address (factory assigned) on the panel and  
once the communication setup process is complete, assign IP Address, Subnet  
Mask, and Gateway values from the DHCP Server.  
5. Press the optional Host Name field to open a Keyboard and enter the Host Name information.  
Modero  
connection  
IP info.  
FIG. 58 Wireless Settings page (IP Settings section)  
6. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.  
7. Do not alter any of these remaining greyed-out fields in the IP Settings section. Once the panel is  
rebooted, these values are obtained by the unit and displayed in the DNS fields after power-up.  
60  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
         
Configuring Communication  
This information can be found in either the Workspace - System name > Define  
Device section of your code (that defines the properties for your panel), or in the  
Device Addressing/Network Addresses section of the Tools > NetLinx Diagnostics  
dialog.  
8. Setup the security and communication parameters between the wireless card and the target WAP by  
configuring the Wireless Settings section on this page. Refer to Step 2: Configuring the Card’s  
Wireless Security Settings section on page 62 for detailed procedures to setup either a secure or  
insecure connection.  
Wireless communication using a Static IP Address  
1. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the Protected  
Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
2. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field and press Done when finished.  
3. Press the Wireless Settings button (located on the lower-left) to open the Wireless Settings page.  
Wireless communication is set within the IP Settings section of this page (FIG. 58).  
Check with your System Administrator for a pre-reserved Static IP Address assigned  
to the panel. This address must be obtained before Static assignment of the panel  
continues.  
4. Toggle the DHCP/Static field (from the IP Settings section) until the choice cycles to Static.  
The IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway fields then become user-editable (red).  
5. Press the IP Address field to open a Keyboard and enter the Static IP Address (provided by your  
System Administrator).  
6. Press Done after you are finished entering the IP information.  
7. Repeat the same process for the Subnet Mask and Gateway fields.  
8. Press the optional Host Name field to open the Keyboard and enter the Host Name information.  
9. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.  
10. Press the Primary DNS field to open a Keyboard, enter the Primary DNS Address (provided by your  
System Administrator) and press Done when compete. Repeat this process for the Secondary DNS  
field.  
11. Press the Domain field to open a Keyboard, enter the resolvable domain Address (this is provided  
by your System Administrator and equates to a unique Internet name for the panel), and press Done  
when complete.  
12. Setup the security and communication parameters between the wireless card and the target WAP by  
configuring the Wireless Settings section on this page. Refer to the following section for detailed  
procedures to setup either a secure or insecure connection.  
61  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Step 2: Configuring the Card’s Wireless Security Settings  
The second step to successfully setting up your wireless card is to configure the Wireless Settings section  
of the Wireless Settings page. The section configures both the communication and security parameters  
from the internal wireless card to the WAP. The procedures outlined within the following sections use  
an NXA-WAP200G and the target WAP.  
Once you have completed setting up the wireless card parameters, you must then  
navigate to the System Settings page and configure the communication parameters  
for the target Master. Until those parameters are configured, your Connection Status  
icon will remain red (indicating that there is no current connection to a Master).  
Configuring the Modero’s wireless card for unsecured access to a WAP200G  
1. Power-down the Modero unit and follow the wireless card installation procedures outlined in Step 2:  
2. Power-up the panel (this allows it to detect the card).  
3. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the Protected  
Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
4. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field and press Done when finished.  
5. Press the Wireless Settings button (located on the lower-left) to open the Wireless Settings page.  
6. From within the Wireless Settings section of the Wireless Settings page, touch the Network Name  
(SSID) field (FIG. 59).  
Mini-PCI  
settings  
FIG. 59 Wireless Settings page (showing default values)  
7. From the Service Set Identifier keyboard, enter the SSID name used by your target Wireless Access  
Point (case sensitive).  
The card should be given the SSID used by the target WAP. If this field is left blank, the unit  
will attempt to connect to the first available WAP. By default, all WAP200Gs use AMX as  
their assigned SSID value.  
One of the most common problems associated with connection to a WAP arise because the  
SSID was not entered properly. You must maintain the same case when entering the SSID  
information. ABC is not the same as Abc.  
8. Toggle the Authentication field to an Open System (default).  
Open System Authentication allows any device to join the network if the panel’s SSID  
matches the WAP’s SSID.  
9. Toggle the Encryption field until it reads Clear Text (default).  
62  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
The remaining Wireless Settings fields are then greyed-out and become read-only.  
All NXA-WAP200Gs are factory-shipped as an unsecured WAP with no WEP  
encryption. The WAP200G initial Status page will display the status of both the WEP  
and WPA (both disabled).  
10. Verify the fields in the IP Settings section have been properly configured. Refer to Step 1:  
11. Press the Back button to navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the on-screen Reboot  
button to both save any changes and restart the panel. Remember that you will need to navigate to  
the System Settings page and configure the connection to a target Master.  
12. After the panel restarts, return to the Wireless Settings page to verify the Link Quality and Signal  
Strength:  
The bargraphs have been replaced with descriptions: None, Poor, Fair, Good, Very Good,  
and Excellent (FIG. 59).  
The signal strength field should provide some descriptive text regarding the strength  
of the connection to a Wireless Access Point. If there is no signal or no IP Address  
displayed; configuration of your network could be required.  
Refer to the NXA-WAP200G Instruction Manual for more detailed setup and configuration procedures.  
Configuring the Modero’s wireless card for secured access to a WAP200G  
After logging into the WAP200G, the default Status page appears within the web browser. These  
read-only values are "pulled" from some of the other user-configurable Configuration Utility pages. By  
default, wireless Modero panels are configured for unsecured communication to a Wireless Access  
Point. To properly setup both the WAP200G and panel for secure communication, you must first prepare  
the Modero panel and then use the information provided to fill out the fields within the WAP’s  
browser-based Basic Wireless Configuration page.  
Since the code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula, all panels will  
generate identical keys for the same Passphrase. The generators used on WAPs will not produce the same  
key as the Modero generator even if you use the same Passphrase. This is why we recommend creating  
the Current Key FIRST on the Modero and then entering that information into the appropriate  
WAP200G fields.  
1. Power-down the Modero unit and follow the wireless card installation procedures outlined in Step 2:  
When configuring touch panels for wireless communication, verify that no Ethernet  
connector is installed within the panel before the unit is power cycled.  
2. Power-up the panel (this allows it to detect the card).  
3. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the Protected  
Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
4. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field and press Done when finished.  
5. Press the Wireless Settings button (located on the lower-left) to open the Wireless Settings page.  
6. Locate the Wireless Settings section of the Wireless Settings page (FIG. 60).  
63  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
SSID field  
Mini-PCI wireless card communication  
settings (for use with a target WAP)  
Changes on this page take  
effect after using the BACK  
button to return to the  
previous page  
FIG. 60 Wireless Settings page (Wireless Settings section)  
You must first take the SSID name, Current Key string value, and panel MAC  
Address information and then later enter it into the appropriate WAP dialog fields in  
order to "sync-up" the secure connection. These values must be identically  
reproduced on the target WAP.  
7. Touch the Network Name (SSID) field and from the Service Set Identifier keyboard, enter the SSID  
name you will be using on your target Wireless Access Point (case sensitive).  
The card should be given the SSID used by the target WAP. If this field is left blank, the unit  
will attempt to connect to the first available WAP. By default, all WAP200Gs use AMX as  
their assigned SSID value.  
One of the most common problems associated with connection to a WAP arise because the  
SSID was not entered properly. You must maintain the same case when entering the SSID  
information. ABC is not the same as Abc.  
The alpha-numeric string is by default AMX but can later be changed to any 32-character  
entry. This string must be duplicated within the Network Name (SSID) field on the WAP.  
As an example, if you use TECHPUBS as your SSID, you must match this word and the  
case within both the Network Name (SSID) field on the touch panel’s Network Name SSID  
field and on the WAP’s Basic Wireless Configuration page.  
8. Leave the Authentication field reading Open System (default).  
Open System Authentication allows any device to join the network if the panel’s SSID  
matches the WAP’s SSID. An Open System is recommended for communication between  
Modero panels and an NXA-WAP200G.  
Shared Key Authentication requires that the panel and the Wireless Access Point have the  
same WEP Key to authenticate.  
9. Toggle the Encryption field (FIG. 60) until it reads WEP64 or WEP128. The 64/128 selection  
reflects the bit-level of encryption security. This WEP encryption level must match the encryption  
level being used on the WAP.  
WEP will not work unless the same Default Key is set on both the panel and the  
Wireless Access Point.  
For example: if you have your Wireless Access Point set to default key 4 (which  
was 01:02:03:04:05), you must set the panel’s key 4 to 01:02:03:04:05.  
64  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Configuring Communication  
10. Toggle the Default Key field until the you’ve chosen a WEP Key value (from 1- 4) that matches  
what you’ll be using on your target WAP200G.  
These WEP Key identifier values must match for both devices.  
11. With the proper WEP Key value displayed, press the Generate button to launch the WEP  
Passphrase keyboard.  
If you are wanting to have your target WAP (other than a 200G) generate the Current Key - Do  
not press the Generate button and continue with Step 14.  
This keyboard allows you to enter a Passphrase (such as AMXPanel) and then  
AUTOMATICALLY generate a WEP key which is compatible only among Modero panels.  
The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation formula.  
Therefore, this same Passphrase generates identical keys when done on any  
Modero because they all use the same Modero-specific generator. The Passphrase  
generator is case sensitive.  
12. Within this on-screen WEP Passphrase keyboard (FIG. 61), enter a character string or word (such as  
AMXPanel) and press Done when you have finished.  
FIG. 61 WEP Passphrase Keyboard  
As an example, enter the word AMXPanel using a 128-bit hex digit encryption. After  
pressing Done, the on-screen Current Key field displays a long string of characters (separated  
by colons) which represents the encryption key equivalent to the word AMXPanel.  
This series of hex digits (26 hex digits for a 128-bit encryption key) should be entered as  
the Current Key into both the WAP and onto other communicating Modero panels by  
using the WEP Key dialog (FIG. 62).  
FIG. 62 WEP Key # Keyboard  
65  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
13. Write down this Current Key string value for later entry into your WAP’s WEP Key field (typically  
entered without colons) and into the communicating panel’s Current Key field (FIG. 60).  
14. If you are entering a Current Key generated either by your target WAP or another Modero  
panel, within the WEP Keys section, touch the Key # button to launch the WEP Key # keyboard  
(FIG. 62), enter the characters and press Done when finished.  
This Key value corresponds to the Default WEP Key number used on the Wireless Access  
Point and selected in the Default Key field described in the previous step.  
If your target Wireless Access Point does not support passphrase key generation and  
has previously been setup with a manually entered WEP KEY, you must manually  
enter that same WEP key on your panel.  
15. Verify the fields within the IP Settings section have been properly configured. Refer to Step 1:  
16. Press the Back button to navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the on-screen Reboot  
button to both save any changes and restart the panel. Remember that you will need to navigate to  
the System Settings page and configure the connection to a target Master.  
17. After the panel restarts, return to the Wireless Settings page to verify the Link Quality and Signal  
Strength:  
The bargraphs have been replaced with descriptions: None, Poor, Fair, Good, Very Good,  
and Excellent.  
The signal strength field provides some descriptive text regarding the strength of the  
connection to a Wireless Access Point. If there is no signal or no IP Address  
displayed; configuration of your network could be required.  
Refer to the NXA-WAP200G Instruction Manual for more detailed setup and configuration procedures.  
Configuring multiple wireless Moderos to communicate to a target WAP200G  
1. For each communicating touch panel, complete all of the steps outlined within the previous  
Those procedures walk you through assigning an SSID, selecting a WEP encryption level, and  
obtaining a Current Key string value for a specific WEP Key on a target panel.  
2. Navigate back to the Wireless/Wireless Settings page on each panel.  
3. Verify that all communicating Modero panels are using the same SSID, encryption level, Default  
Key #, and an identical Current Key value.  
As an example, all panels should be set to Default Key #1 and be using aa:bb:cc..as the  
Current Key string value. This same Key value and Current Key string should be used on the  
target WAP.  
4. Repeat steps 1 - 3 on each panel. Using the same passphrase, generates the same key for all  
communicating Modero panels.  
66  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Configuring a Wired Ethernet Connection  
It is necessary to tell the panel which Master it should be communicating with. This "pointing to a  
Master" is done via the System Settings page where you configure the IP Address, System Number and  
Username/Password information assigned to the target Master. If you have previously established a  
wireless connection to the Internet you must still navigate to the System Settings page and configure the  
communication parameters for the target Master. Until those parameters are configured, your Connection  
Status icon will remain red (indicating there is no current connection to a Master).  
If you have previously configured an internal wireless card for communication to the Internet,  
you do not need to configure the panel’s IP Settings fields and can skip the following Step 1.  
Step 1: Configuring the Panel’s Wired IP Settings  
There are only two available methods of communicating to a target Master over the Internet: Wireless  
(via an internal card) or Wired (direct Ethernet connection). If you are not using an internal wireless  
card, you can only configure the connection parameters through the System Settings page. This type of  
communication can be established either via either a Dynamic IP Address (DHCP) or via a  
pre-reserved Static IP Address (typically provided by your System Administrator).  
IP Settings section - Configuring a DHCP Address over Ethernet  
1. Select Protected Setup > System Settings (located on the lower-left) to open the System Settings  
page.  
2. Locate the IP Settings section of this page.  
Even though the Host, Gateway, Primary DNS, Secondary DNS, and Domain fields  
appear on the two separate System Settings and Wireless Settings pages; the  
information populating these fields is identical.  
If the information within one of these fields is altered, the change is reflected on both  
pages within the altered field.  
Example: Domain is altered on Wireless Settings page, the value is then also  
changed within the Domain field of the System Settings page.  
3. Toggle the DHCP/Static field (from the IP Settings section) until the choice cycles to DHCP.  
DHCP will register the unique MAC Address (factory assigned) on the panel and  
once the communication setup process is complete, reserve an IP Address, Subnet  
Mask, and Gateway values from the DHCP Server.  
4. Press the optional Host Name field to open a Keyboard and enter the Host Name information.  
5. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.  
6. Do not alter any of the remaining greyed-out fields in the IP Settings section. Once the panel is  
rebooted, these values are obtained by the unit and displayed in the DNS fields after power-up.  
This information can be found in either the: Workspace- System name > Define  
Device section of your code (that defines the properties for your panel), or in the  
Device Addressing/Network Addresses in the Tools > NetLinx Diagnostics dialog.  
7. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page.  
8. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel.  
67  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Configuring Communication  
IP Settings section - Configuring a Static IP Address over Ethernet  
1. Select Protected Setup > System Settings (located on the lower-left) to open the System Settings  
page.  
2. Locate the IP Settings section of this page.  
Check with your System Administrator for a pre-reserved Static IP Address assigned  
to the panel. This address must be obtained before Static assignment of the panel  
continues.  
3. Toggle the DHCP/Static field (from the IP Settings section) until the choice cycles to Static.  
4. Press the IP Address field to open a Keyboard and enter the Static IP Address (provided by your  
System Administrator).  
5. Press Done after you are finished entering the IP information.  
6. Repeat the same process for the Subnet Mask and Gateway fields.  
7. Press the optional Host Name field to open the Keyboard and enter the Host Name information.  
8. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string of the host name.  
9. Press the Primary DNS field to open a Keyboard, enter the Primary DNS Address (provided by your  
System Administrator) and press Done when compete. Repeat this process for the Secondary DNS  
field.  
10. Press the Domain field to open a Keyboard, enter the resolvable domain Address (this is provided by  
your System Administrator and equates to a unique Internet name for the panel), and press Done  
when complete.  
11. Navigate to the Master Connection section of this page to begin configuring the communication  
parameters for the target Master.  
Step 2: Choosing a Master Connection Mode Setting  
There are three Ethernet MODE settings used in the Master Connection section of the System Settings  
page. URL is the most common method.  
Master Connection MODE options:  
URL (Uniform Resource Locator) is the address that defines the route to a file on the Web or  
any other Internet facility.  
In this system, the panel acts as a "Client" and the Master acts as a Server (in that Clients attach  
to it).  
LISTEN sets the Modero panel to "listen" for broadcasts from the Master (using the panel IP from  
its URL list). In this system, the panel acts as a "Server" (in that Clients attach to it) and the Master  
acts as a "Client".  
AUTO is used to instruct the Modero to search for a Master that uses the same System Number  
(assigned within the Master Connection section) and resides on the same Subnet as itself. In this  
case, the Master has its UDP feature enabled.  
This UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a protocol within the TCP/IP protocol suite that is used in  
place of TCP when a reliable delivery is not required.  
This UDP enabling is done through a Telnet session on the Master. Refer to the particular NetLinx  
Master manual for more detailed information.  
68  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Configuring Communication  
Step 3: Configuring the Ethernet Connection Type  
When using Ethernet as your communication method, the NetLinx Master must first  
be setup with either a Static IP or DHCP Address obtained from either NetLinx Studio  
or your System Administrator.  
Before beginning:  
1. Verify the panel has been configured to communicate either through an Ethernet cable (connected  
from either the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub) or to a wirelessly to the Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
Before commencing, verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master firmware.  
2. Verify that the NetLinx Master is receiving power and is communicating via an Ethernet connection  
with the PC running NetLinx Studio.  
3. Connect the terminal end of the 12 VDC-compliant power supply cable to the power connector on  
the rear/side of the touch panel.  
4. Verify the green Ethernet LED (from the rear Ethernet port on the Master) is illuminated (indicating  
a proper connection).  
5. Verify the yellow LED (from the rear Ethernet port on the Master) is blinking (indicating  
communication).  
6. After the panel powers-up, press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (for 3 seconds) to  
proceed to the Setup page.  
7. Select Protected Setup > System Settings (located on the lower-left) to open the System Settings  
page (FIG. 63).  
Obtained  
from  
NetLinx  
Master  
FIG. 63 System Settings page  
69  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
Master Connection - Virtual Master communication over Ethernet  
When configuring your panel to communicate with a Virtual Master (on your PC) via  
Ethernet, the Master IP/URL field must be configured to match the IP Address of the  
PC and make sure to use the Virtual System value assigned to the Virtual Master  
within NetLinx Studio.  
Before beginning:  
1. Verify the panel has been configured to communicate either through an Ethernet cable (connected  
from either the panel to a valid Ethernet Hub) or wireless to the Wireless Access Point.  
2. Launch NetLinx Studio 2.x (default location is Start > Programs > AMX Control Disc > NetLinx  
Studio 2 > NetLinx Studio 2).  
3. Select Settings > Master Communication Settings, from the Main menu to open the Master  
Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 64).  
Enter this IP  
into the  
Master IP/URL  
field on the  
System Settings  
IP Addresses of computer  
page  
(also obtained by using the  
Start > Run > cmd command)  
FIG. 64 Assigning Communication Settings and TCP/IP Settings for a Virtual Master  
4. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog.  
5. Click on the NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section) to indicate that you  
are working as a NetLinx Master.  
6. Click on the Virtual Master radio box (from the Transport Connection Option section) to indicate  
you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate with a panel. Everything else such as the  
Authentication is greyed-out because you are not going through the Master’s UI.  
7. Click the Edit Settings button (on the Communications Settings dialog) to open the Virtual NetLinx  
Master Settings dialog (FIG. 64).  
8. From within this dialog enter the System number (default is 1) and note the IP Address of the target  
PC being used as the Virtual Master. This IP Address can also be obtained by following these  
procedures:  
On your PC, click Start > Run to open the Run dialog.  
Enter cmd into the Open field and click OK to open the command DOS prompt.  
From the C:\> command line, enter ipconfig to display the IP Address of the PC. This  
information is entered into the Master IP/URL field on the panel.  
9. Click OK three times to close the open dialogs, save your settings, and return to the main NetLinx  
Studio application.  
70  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
10. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System.  
The default System value is one.  
11. Right-click on the Empty Device Tree/System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate the  
list.  
12. Power-up your panel and press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (for 3 seconds) to  
continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page.  
13. Select Protected Setup > System Settings (located on the lower-left) to open the System Settings  
page (FIG. 65).  
The System Number is  
assigned to the Master  
within the AMX  
software application  
(these must match)  
Enter the IP Address  
information of the PC  
used as a Virtual  
Master  
When using a Virtual Master,  
there is no need to enter a  
username and/or password  
FIG. 65 Sample System Settings page (for Virtual Master communication)  
14. Press the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to the word  
Ethernet. ICSNet communication cannot be used on either 1200V-Series or VG-Series panels.  
15. Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL.  
By selecting URL, the System Number field becomes read-only (grey) because the panel pulls  
this value directly from the communicating target Master (virtual or not). A Virtual Master  
system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as: NetLinx Studio,  
TPD4, or IREdit.  
16. Press the Master IP/URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the IP Address of the PC used as the  
Virtual Master.  
17. Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Settings page.  
18. Do not alter the Master Port Number value (this is the default value used by NetLinx).  
19. Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page.  
20. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel.  
71  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Master Connection section - NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address - URL Mode  
In this mode, enter the System Number (zero for an unknown System Number) and the IP/URL of the  
Master (Master Port Number is defaulted to 1319).  
1. Press the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to the word  
Ethernet. Refer to the System Settings Page section on page 118 for more information about the  
fields on this page.  
2. Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL.  
By selecting URL, the System Number field becomes read-only (grey) because the panel pulls  
this value directly from the communicating target Master (virtual or not). A Virtual Master  
system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as: NetLinx Studio,  
TPD4, or IREdit.  
If the panel does not appear within the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window of  
NetLinx Studio, check to make sure that the NetLinx Master System Number (from  
within the Device Addressing dialog) is correctly assigned.  
3. Press the Master IP/URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the Master IP Address (obtained from  
the Diagnostics - Networking Address dialog of the NetLinx Studio application).  
4. Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Settings page.  
5. Do not alter the Master Port Number value (this is the default value used by NetLinx).  
6. Enter a username and password (into their respective fields) if the target Master has been previously  
secured.  
7. Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page.  
8. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel.  
Master Connection section - NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address - Listen Mode  
In this mode, you must add the Modero panel IP Address into the URL List of the Master (using NetLinx  
Studio). This mode sets the Modero panel to "listen" for broadcasts from the Master (using the panel IP  
from its URL list).  
1. Obtain either a Static IP for the Modero panel (from your System Administrator) or a DHCP  
Address from the IP Settings of the System Settings page.  
The DHCP/Static field (in the IP Settings section of the System Settings page) must be set to  
DHCP to get Dynamic IP information for the panel.  
Press the on-screen Reboot (from the Protected Setup page) to both save any changes and  
restart the panel.  
After power-up, press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to access the Setup  
page.  
Navigate to the Setup > Protected Setup > System Settings page and note the newly  
obtained Dynamic IP Address information from the IP Settings section. This information is  
then entered into the URL List for the connected NetLinx Master.  
2. Toggle the blue Type field until Ethernet is selected (from the Master Connection section of the  
System Settings page).  
3. Press the Mode field (to set the connection Mode) until the choice cycles to the word Listen.  
4. Enter a username and password (into their respective fields) if the target Master has been previously  
secured.  
5. Select the OnLine Tree tab from the Workspace window.  
72  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
6. Select Diagnostics > URL Listing from the Main menu (FIG. 66).  
System Address  
reflects the value  
set in the Device  
Addressing tab  
Used to obtain an  
existing URL  
List from Master  
Used to set the  
URL List  
on Master  
FIG. 66 URL List dialog  
7. Enter the System and Device number for the specific Master associated with your panel (as seen in  
the Online Tree tab).  
8. Click Add and enter the IP Address of the Modero touch panel into the Add URL dialog box.  
9. Click OK to enter your IP Address and add it to the list.  
10. Click Done once you are finished adding your panel information to the list.  
11. Press the on-screen Reboot button to save any changes and restart the panel.  
Master Connection section - NetLinx Master Ethernet IP Address - Auto Mode  
In this mode, enter the System Number of the NetLinx Master. This mode instructs the Modero to search  
for a Master that uses the same System Number (assigned within the Master Connection section) and  
resides on the same Subnet as itself.  
1. Toggle the blue Type field until Ethernet is selected (from the Master Connection section of the  
System Settings page).  
2. Press the Mode field until the choice cycles to the word Auto.  
3. Press the System Number field to launch a Keypad and enter the value for the system number of the  
NetLinx Master. This value can be obtained from the NetLinx Studio program > OnLine Tree of the  
Workspace window.  
4. Do not alter the IP Settings section, of the System Settings page, as these fields are not applicable to  
this connection mode.  
5. Enter a username and password (into their respective fields) if the target Master has been previously  
secured.  
6. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel.  
7. Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page and confirm there is  
an active connection.  
The NetLinx Master and the Modero panel must both be on the same Subnet.  
73  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Using G4 Web Control to Interact with a G4 Panel  
The G4 Web Control feature allows you to use a PC to interact with a G4 enabled panel via the web. This  
feature works in tandem with the new browser-capable NetLinx Security firmware update  
(build 300 or higher). G4 Web Control is only available with the latest Modero panel firmware.  
Refer to the G4 Web Control Page section on page 108 for more detailed field information.  
Verify your NetLinx Master (ME260/64 or NI-Series) has been installed with the latest  
firmware KIT file from www.amx.com. Refer to your NetLinx Master Instruction  
Manual for more detailed information on the use of the new web-based NetLinx  
Security.  
1. Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page.  
2. Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the panel page) to open the Protected  
Setup page and display an on-screen keypad.  
3. Enter 1988 into the Keypad’s password field (1988 is the default password).  
Clearing Password #5, from the initial Password Setup page, removes the need for  
you to enter the default password before accessing the Protected Setup page.  
4. Press Done when finished.  
5. Press the G4 Web Control button to open the G4 Web Control page (FIG. 67).  
FIG. 67 G4 Web Control page  
6. Press the Enable/Enabled button until it toggles to Enabled (light blue color).  
7. The Network Interface Select field is read-only and displays the method of communication to the  
web. Verify you have selected the proper interface connection as this field does not auto-detect  
the connection type being used (see below).  
Wired is used when a direct Ethernet connection is being used for communication to the web.  
This is the default setting if either no wireless interface card is detected or if both an Ethernet  
and wireless card connection is detected by the panel.  
Wireless is used when a wireless card is detected within the internal card slot. This method  
provides an indirect communication to the web via a pre-configured Wireless Access Point.  
8. Press the Web Control Name field to open the Web Name keyboard.  
74  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Configuring Communication  
9. From the Web Name keyboard, enter a unique alpha-numeric string to identify this panel. This  
information is used by the NetLinx Security Web Server to display on-screen links to the panel. The  
on-screen links use the IP Address of the panel and not the name for communication (FIG. 68).  
FIG. 68 Sample relationship between G4 Web Control and Mange WebControl Connections window  
10. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string for the Web Control name.  
11. Press the Web Control Password field to open the Web Password keyboard.  
12. From the Web Password keyboard, enter a unique alpha-numeric string to be assigned as the G4  
Authentication session password associated with VNC web access of this panel.  
13. Press Done after you are finished assigning the alpha-numeric string for the Web Control password.  
14. Press the Web Control Port field to open the Web Port Number keypad.  
15. Within the keypad, enter a unique numeric value to be assigned to the port the VNC Web Server is  
running on. The default value is 5900.  
16. Press Done when you are finished entering the value. The remaining fields within the G4 Web  
Control Settings section of this page are read-only and cannot be altered.  
17. Press the Up/Down arrows on either sides of the G4 Web Control Timeout field to increase or  
decrease the amount of time the panel can remain idle (no cursor movements) before the session is  
closed and the user is disconnected.  
18. Press the Back button to open the Protected Setup page.  
19. Press the on-screen Reboot button to save any changes and restart the panel.  
Verify your NetLinx Master’s IP Address and System Number have been properly  
entered into the Master Connection section of the System Settings page.  
75  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Configuring Communication  
Using your NetLinx Master to control the G4 panel  
Refer to your particular NetLinx Master’s instruction manual for detailed information on how to  
download the latest firmware from www.amx.com. This firmware build enables SSL certificate  
identification and encryption, HTTPS communication, ICSP data encryption, and disables the ability to  
alter the Master security properties via a TELNET session.  
In order to fully utilize the SSL encryption, your web browser should incorporate the an encryption  
feature. This encryption level is displayed as a Cipher strength.  
Once the Master’s IP Address has been set through NetLinx Studio version 2.x or higher:  
1. Launch your web browser.  
2. Enter the IP Address of the target Master (ex: http://198.198.99.99) into the web browser’s Address  
field.  
3. Press the Enter key on your keyboard to begin the communication process between the target  
Master and your computer.  
Initially, the Master Security option is disabled (from within the System Security page) and  
no username and password is required for access or configuration.  
Both HTTP and HTTPS Ports are enabled by default (via the Manage System > Server  
page).  
If the Master has been previously configured for secured communication, click OK to accept  
the AMX SSL certificate (if SSL is enabled) and then enter a valid username and password  
into the fields within the Login dialog.  
4. Click OK to enter the information and proceed to the Master’s Manage WebControls window.  
5. This Manage WebControl Connections page (FIG. 69) is accessed by clicking on the Manage  
connections link (within the Web Control section within the Navigation frame). Once activated, this  
page displays links to G4 panels running the latest G4 Web Control feature (previously setup and  
activated on the panel).  
Compatible  
devices field  
(showing G4  
WebControl links)  
G4 panels  
Compression  
Options  
FIG. 69 Manage WebControl Connections page (populated with compatible panels)  
6. Click on the G4 panel name link associated with the target panel. A secondary web browser window  
appears on the screen (FIG. 70).  
76  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
FIG. 70 Web Control VNC installation and Password entry screens  
7. Click Yes from the Security Alert popup window to agree to the installation of the G4 WebControl  
application on your computer. This application contains the necessary Active X and VNC client  
applications necessary to properly view and control the panel pages from your computer.  
The G4 Web Control application is sent by the panel to the computer that is used for  
communication. Once the application is installed, this popup will no longer appear.  
This popup will only appear if you are connecting to the target panel using a different  
computer.  
8. In some cases, you might get a Connection Details dialog (FIG. 71) requesting a VNC Server IP  
Address. This is the IP Address not the IP of the Master but of the target touch panel. Depending on  
which method of communication you are using, it can be found in either the:  
Wired Ethernet - System Settings > IP Settings section within the IP Address field.  
Wireless - Wireless Settings > IP Settings section within the IP Address field.  
If you do not get this field continue to step 9.  
IP Address of touch panel  
- obtained from IP Settings section of  
the System Settings page  
FIG. 71 Connection Details dialog  
9. If a WebControl password was setup on the G4 WebControl page, a G4 Authentication Session  
password dialog box appears on the screen within the secondary browser window.  
10. Enter the Web Control session password into the Session Password field (FIG. 70). This password  
was previously entered into the Web Control Password field within the G4 Web Control page on the  
panel.  
77  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Configuring Communication  
11. Click OK to send the password to the panel and begin the session. A confirmation message appears  
stating "Please wait, Initial screen loading.".  
The secondary window then becomes populated with the same G4 page being displayed on the target G4  
panel. A small circle appears within the on-screen G4 panel page and corresponds to the location of the  
mouse cursor. A left-mouse click on the computer-displayed panel page equates to an actual touch on the  
target G4 panel page.  
78  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
Before beginning the Upgrade process:  
Setup and configure your NetLinx Master. Refer to your particular NetLinx Master instruction  
manual for detailed setup procedures.  
Calibrate and prepare the communication pages on the Modero panel for use. Refer to the  
Refer to the NetLinx Studio version 2.x or higher Help file for more information on uploading  
files via Ethernet.  
Configure your panel for either direct connect or wireless communication. Refer to the  
Configuring Communication section on page 51 for more detailed information about Ethernet  
or Wireless communication.  
It is recommended that firmware Kit files only be transferred over a direct Ethernet  
connection and only when the panel is connected to a power supply.  
If battery power or wireless connection fails during a firmware upgrade, the panel  
flash file system may become corrupted.  
The process of updating firmware involves the use of a communicating NetLinx Master. The required  
steps for updating firmware to a Modero panel are virtually identical to those necessary for updating Kit  
files to a NetLinx Master (except the target device is a panel instead of a Master). Refer to either your  
Master’s literature or Studio 2.x Help file for those procedures.  
A touch panel which is not using a valid username and password will not be able to  
communicate with a secured Master. If you are updating the firmware on or through a  
panel which is not using a username or password field, you must first remove the  
Master Security feature to establish an unsecured connection.  
Upgrading the Modero Firmware via the USB port  
Before beginning with this section, verify your panel is powered and the Type-A USB connector is  
securely inserted into the PC’s USB port. The panel must be powered-on before connecting the mini-  
USB connector to the panel.  
Establishing a USB connection between the PC and the panel, prior to installing the  
USB Driver will cause a failure in the USB driver installation.  
Step 1: Configure the panel for a USB Connection Type  
1. After the installation of the USB driver has been completed, confirm the proper installation of the  
large Type-A USB connector to the PC's USB port, and restart your machine.  
2. After the panel powers-up, press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (for 3 seconds) to  
continue with the setup process and proceed to the Setup page.  
3. Select Protected Setup > System Settings (located on the lower-left) to open the System Settings  
page.  
4. Toggle the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to USB.  
79  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
ALL fields are then greyed-out and read-only, but still display any previous network  
information.  
5. Press the Back button on the touch panel to return to the Protected Setup page.  
6. Press the on-screen Reboot button to both save any changes and restart the panel. Remember that  
the panel’s connection type must be set to USB prior to rebooting the panel and prior to inserting  
the USB connector.  
7. ONLY AFTER the unit displays the first panel page, THEN insert the mini-USB connector into  
the Program Port on the panel. It may take a minute for the panel to detect the new connection and  
send a signal to the PC (indicated by a green System Connection icon).  
If a few minutes have gone by and the System Connection icon still does not turn green,  
complete the procedures in the following section to setup the Virtual Master and refresh the  
System from the Online Tree. This action sends out a request to the panel to respond and  
completes the communication (turning the System Connection icon green).  
8. Navigate back to the System Settings page.  
Step 2: Prepare NetLinx Studio for communication via the USB port  
1. Launch NetLinx Studio 2.x (default location is Start > Programs > AMX Control Disc > NetLinx  
Studio 2 > NetLinx Studio 2).  
2. Select Settings > Master Communication Settings, from the Main menu to open the Master  
Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 72).  
IP Address of computer  
(not needed as this is a direct  
USB connection)  
FIG. 72 Assigning Communication Settings for a Virtual Master  
3. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog.  
4. Click on the NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section) to indicate that you  
are working as a NetLinx Master.  
5. Click on the Virtual Master radio box (from the Transport Connection Option section) to indicate  
you are wanting to configure the PC to communicate directly with a panel. Everything else such as  
the Authentication is greyed-out because you are not going through the Master’s UI.  
6. Click the Edit Settings button (on the Communications Settings dialog) to open the Virtual NetLinx  
Master Settings dialog (FIG. 72).  
80  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
7. From within this dialog enter the System number (default is 1).  
8. Click OK three times to close the open dialogs, save your settings, and return to the main NetLinx  
Studio application.  
9. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the Virtual System. The  
default System value is one.  
10. Right-click on the Empty Device Tree/System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate the  
list.  
The panel will not appear as a device below the virtual system number (in the Online Tree tab)  
until both the system number used in step 7 for the VNM is entered into the Master Connection  
section of the System Settings page and the panel is restarted.  
Step 3: Confirm and Upgrade the firmware via the USB port  
Use the CC-USB Type-A to Mini-B 5-wire programming cable (FG10-5965) to provide communication  
between the mini-USB Program port on the touch panel and the PC. This method of communication is  
used to transfer firmware Kit files and TPD4 touch panel files.  
A mini-USB connection is only detected after it is installed onto an active panel.  
Connection to a previously powered panel which then reboots, allows the PC to  
detect the panel and assign an appropriate USB driver.  
1. Verify this direct USB connection (Type-A on the panel to mini-USB on the panel) is configured  
properly using the steps outlined in the previous two sections.  
2. With the panel already configured for USB communication and the Virtual Master setup within  
NetLinx Studio, its now time to verify the panel is ready to receive files.  
3. After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the  
Virtual Master and the panel, click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window (FIG. 73) to  
view the devices on the Virtual System. The default System value is one.  
4. Right-click on the System entry (FIG. 73) and select Refresh System to re-populate the list. Verify  
the panel appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window.  
The default Modero panel value is 10001.  
Showing a Master  
firmware version and  
device number  
Showing the current Modero  
panel firmware version and  
device number  
Shows NetLinx Studio  
version number  
FIG. 73 NetLinx Workspace window (showing panel connection via a Virtual NetLinx Master)  
The panel firmware is shown on the right of the listed panel.  
Download the latest firmware file from www.amx.com and then save the Kit file to  
your computer.  
81  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
5. If the panel firmware being used is not current, download the latest Kit file by first logging in to  
www.amx.com and then navigate to Tech Center > Firmware Files and from within the Modero  
section of the web page locate your Modero panel.  
6. Click on the desired Kit file link and after you’ve accepted the Licensing Agreement, verify you  
have downloaded the Modero Kit file to a known location.  
7. From within Studio, select Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to NetLinx Device from the Main  
menu to open the Send to NetLinx Device dialog (B in FIG. 74). Verify the panel’s System and  
Device number values match those values listed within the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of  
the Workspace window (A in FIG. 74).  
A
B
FIG. 74 Using USB for a Virtual Master transfer  
8. Select the panel’s Kit file from the Files section.  
9. Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the Master  
(listed in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window). The Port field is greyed-out.  
10. Click the Reboot Device checkbox. This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware update  
process is complete. The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware process has  
finished.  
11. Click Send to begin the transfer. The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom-right of the  
dialog (B in FIG. 74).  
12. As the panel is rebooting, temporarily unplug the USB connector on the panel until the panel has  
completely restarted.  
13. Reconnect the USB connector to the panel.  
14. Right-click the associated System number and select Refresh System. This causes a refresh of all  
project systems, establishes a new connection to the Master, and populates the System list with  
devices on your particular system.  
15. Confirm the panel has been properly updated to the correct firmware version.  
82  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
Upgrading the Modero Firmware via an IP Address  
Before beginning with this section, verify that your panel is powered and connected to the NetLinx  
Master through an Ethernet connection (direct or wireless).  
Step 1: Prepare the Master for communication via an IP  
1. Obtain the IP Address of the NetLinx Master from your System Administrator. If you do not have  
an IP Address for the Master, refer to your particular Master’s instruction manual for more  
information on obtaining this IP Address using NetLinx Studio 2.  
From the Online Tree tab of the Workspace window, select the NetLinx Master.  
Follow steps outlined in either the Obtaining or Assigning the Master’s IP Address sections  
from your particular NetLinx Master instruction manual to use an address.  
Note the IP Address and Gateway information.  
2. Launch NetLinx Studio 2.x (default location is Start > Programs > AMX Control Disc > NetLinx  
Studio 2 > NetLinx Studio 2).  
3. Select Settings > Master Communication Settings from the Main menu to open the Master  
Communication Settings dialog (FIG. 75).  
FIG. 75 Assigning Communication Settings and TCP/IP Settings  
4. Click the Communications Settings button to open the Communications Settings dialog.  
5. Click on the NetLinx Master radio button (from the Platform Selection section) to indicate you are  
working with a NetLinx Master (such as the NXC-ME260/64 or NI-Series of Integrated  
Controllers).  
6. Click on the TCP/IP radio button (from the Transport Connection Option section) to indicate you  
are connecting to the Master through an IP Address.  
7. Click the Edit Settings button (on the Communications Settings dialog) to open the TCP/IP  
Settings dialog (FIG. 75). This dialog contains a series of previously entered IP Address/URLs and  
their associated names, all of which are stored within Studio and are user-editable.  
83  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
8. Click the New button to open the New TCP/IP Settings dialog where you can enter both a  
previously obtained DHCP or Static IP Address and an associated description for the connection  
into their respective fields.  
9. Place a checkmark within the Automatically Ping the Master Controller to ensure availability radio  
box to make sure the Master is initially responding online before establishing full communication.  
10. Click OK to close the current New TCP/IP Settings dialog and return to the previous TCP/IP  
Settings dialog where you must locate your new entry within the List of Addresses section.  
11. Click the Select button to make that the currently used IP Address communication parameter.  
12. Click OK to return to the Communications Settings dialog and place a checkmark within the  
Authentication Required radio box if your Master has been previously secured with a  
username/password.  
13. Click on the Authentication Required radio box (if the Master is secured) and then press the User  
Name and Password button to open the Master Controller User Name and Password dialog.  
14. Within this dialog, you must enter a previously configured username and password (with sufficient  
rights) before being able to successfully connect to the Master.  
15. Click OK to save your newly entered information and return to the previous Communication  
Settings dialog where you must click OK again to begin the communication process to your Master.  
If you are currently connected to the assigned Master, a popup asks whether you  
would want to temporarily stop communication to the Master and apply the new  
settings.  
16. Click Yes to interrupt the current communication from the Master and apply the new settings.  
17. Click Reboot (from the Tools > Reboot the Master Controller dialog) and wait for the System  
Master to reboot. The STATUS and OUTPUT LEDs should begin to alternately blink during the  
incorporation. Wait until the STATUS LED is the only LED to blink.  
18. Press Done once until the Master Reboot Status field reads *Reboot of System Complete*.  
19. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the System.  
The default System value is one (1).  
20. Right-click the associated System number and select Refresh System. This establishes a new  
connection to the specified System and populates the list with devices on that system. The  
communication method is then highlighted in green on the bottom of the NetLinx Studio window.  
Step 2: Prepare the panel for communication via an IP  
1. Press the blue Type field (from the Master Connection section) until the choice cycles to the word  
Ethernet.  
2. Press the blue Mode field until the choice cycles to the word URL.  
By selecting URL, the System Number field becomes read-only (grey) because the panel pulls  
this value directly from the communicating target Master (virtual or not). A Virtual Master  
system value can be set within the active AMX software applications such as: NetLinx Studio,  
TPD4, or IREdit.  
3. Press the red Master IP/URL field to open a Keyboard and enter the NetLinx Master’s IP Address  
(obtained from the Diagnostics - Networking Address dialog of the NetLinx Studio  
application).  
4. Click Done to accept the new value and return to the System Configuration page.  
5. Do not alter the Master Port Number value (this is the default value used by NetLinx).  
84  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
6. Press the Back button to return to the Protected Setup page and press the on-screen Reboot button  
to restart the panel and save any changes.  
Step 3: Verify and Upgrade the panel firmware via an IP  
1. Click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the System. The default  
System value is one.  
2. Right-click the associated System number (from the Workspace window) and select Refresh  
System to detect of all devices on the current system, establish a new connection to the Master, and  
refresh the System list with devices on that system.  
3. After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the  
PC and the Master, verify the panel appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window  
(FIG. 76). The default Modero panel value is 10001.  
Showing a Master  
firmware version and  
device number  
Showing the current Modero  
panel firmware version and  
device number  
Shows NetLinx Studio  
version number  
FIG. 76 NetLinx Workspace window (showing connected Modero panel)  
The panel firmware is shown on the right of the listed panel.  
4. If the panel firmware being used is not current, download the latest Kit file by first logging in to  
www.amx.com and then navigate to Tech Center > Firmware Files and from within the Modero  
section of the web page locate your Modero panel.  
5. Click on the desired Kit file link and after you’ve accepted the Licensing Agreement, verify you  
have downloaded the Modero Kit file to a known location.  
6. From within Studio, select Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to NetLinx Device from the Main  
menu to open the Send to NetLinx Device dialog (FIG. 77). Verify the panel’s System and Device  
number values match those values listed within the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of the  
Workspace window.  
7. Select the panel’s Kit file from the Files section (FIG. 77).  
8. Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the Master  
(listed in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window). The Port field is greyed-out.  
9. Click the Reboot Device checkbox. This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware update  
process is complete. The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware process has  
finished.  
10. Click Send to begin the transfer. The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom-right of the  
dialog (FIG. 77).  
85  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
Selected Firmware file  
Description field for selected Kit file  
Firmware download  
status  
Device value and System number  
must match the values  
listed in the Workspace window  
FIG. 77 Send to NetLinx Device dialog (showing Modero firmware update via IP)  
11. Click Close (after the panel reboots) to return to the main program.  
12. Right-click the associated System number and select Refresh System. This causes a refresh of all  
project systems, establishes a new connection to the Master, and populates the System list with  
devices on your particular system.  
13. Confirm the panel has been properly updated to the correct firmware version.  
Upgrading Accessory Devices via the USB  
The following accessory devices are firmware upgradeable:  
NXA-BASE/B Battery Base (FG2255-10)  
This device is not given a unique device number which would ordinarily appear within the Online Tree  
tab of NetLinx Studio. It appears below the target panel which it is a part of as seen below in FIG. 78.  
Target Panel Device #  
NXA-BASE/B  
(base version)  
NetLinx Studio Online Tree tab  
Accessory’s corresponding firmware page  
FIG. 78 Location of Firmware version information within NetLinx Studio  
86  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
The only way to upgrade the firmware of an accessory item is to send the accessory’s firmware through a  
target panel. Its this panel’s device number which is entered within the Send to NetLinx Device transfer  
dialog in Studio.  
Step 1: Prepare the NXA-BASE/B for firmware transfer via USB  
Before beginning with this section:  
Unplug any connectors from the rear of the NXT panel (power, Ethernet, etc.).  
installation procedures to mount the NXT atop the battery base.  
DO NOT PLACE BATTERIES IN THE BASE BEFORE CONNECTING IT TO THE  
NXT PANEL. Insert batteries into the NXA-BASE/B ONLY AFTER the base has been  
installed onto the bottom of the NXT panel.  
Having batteries in the base before connection can damage the battery base.  
Verify your NXA-BASE/B is securely attached to the bottom of the NXT panel.  
Once the base is secured, side out the battery compartment and install the batteries into the  
battery base. Once the batteries are installed, close the compartment.  
Reconnect all rear connectors to the NXT panel.  
1. Complete the instructions for configuring the NetLinx Master for IP communication found in the  
2. Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page.  
3. Press the Battery Base button to open the Battery Base page (FIG. 79).  
FIG. 79 Battery Base page  
The battery base firmware is shown on the right of the Battery Base page.  
Verify you have downloaded the latest firmware file from www.amx.com and then  
save the Kit file to your computer.  
87  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
Step 2: Upgrade the NXA-BASE/B firmware via USB  
1. Complete the procedures outlined in the Step 1: Configure the panel for a USB Connection  
2. Prepare NetLinx Studio for communication to the panel via a Virtual Master by following the  
3. After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the  
Virtual Master and the panel, click the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the  
devices on the Virtual System. The default System value is one.  
4. Right-click on the System entry and select Refresh System to re-populate the list. Verify the panel  
appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window.  
The default Modero panel value is 10001.  
5. Locate the latest Kit file by first logging in to www.amx.com and then navigate to Tech Center >  
Firmware Files and from within the Modero section of the web page locate the Battery Base.  
6. Click on the desired Kit file link and after you’ve accepted the Licensing Agreement, verify you  
have downloaded the Modero Battery Base Kit file to a known location.  
7. From within Studio, select Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to NetLinx Device from the Main  
menu to open the Send to NetLinx Device dialog. Verify the panel’s System and Device number  
values match those values listed within the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace  
window.  
8. Select the battery base’s Kit file from the Files section.  
9. Enter the Device number associated with the panel and the System number associated with the  
Master (listed in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window). The Port field is greyed-out.  
The firmware for the battery base can not be downloaded directly. Download of the  
Kit file to the BASE/1 is done through the panel.  
10. Click the Reboot Device checkbox. This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware update  
process is complete. The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware process has  
finished.  
11. Click Send to begin the transfer. The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom-right of the  
dialog.  
12. As the panel is rebooting, temporarily unplug the USB connector on the panel until the panel has  
completely restarted.  
13. Reconnect the USB connector to the panel.  
14. Right-click the associated System number and select Refresh System. This causes a refresh of all  
project systems, establishes a new connection to the Master, and populates the System list with  
devices on your particular system.  
15. Confirm the base has been properly updated to the correct firmware version by pressing the Battery  
Base button to open the Battery Base page.  
88  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
Upgrading Accessory Devices via an IP Address  
The following accessory devices are firmware upgradeable:  
NXA-BASE/B Battery Base (FG2255-10)  
This device is not given a unique device number which would ordinarily appear within the Online Tree  
tab of NetLinx Studio. It appears below the target panel which it is a part of as seen in FIG. 78 on  
The only way to upgrade the firmware of an accessory item is to send the accessory’s firmware through a  
target panel. Its this panel’s device number which is entered within the Send to NetLinx Device transfer  
dialog in Studio.  
Firmware can also be downloaded to accessory items via a direct USB connection  
using the PC as a Virtual Master. In this case, you will still need to know the System  
and Device Number information of the target panel. For a more detailed description of  
how to setup this type of connection, refer to the Upgrading Accessory Devices via  
Step 1: Prepare the NXA-BASE/B for firmware transfer via an IP  
Before beginning with this section:  
Unplug any connectors from the rear of the NXT panel (power, Ethernet, etc.).  
installation procedures to mount the NXT atop the battery base.  
DO NOT PLACE BATTERIES IN THE BASE BEFORE CONNECTING IT TO THE  
NXT PANEL. Insert batteries into the NXA-BASE/B ONLY AFTER the base has been  
installed onto the bottom of the NXT panel.  
Having batteries in the base before connection can damage the battery base.  
Verify your NXA-BASE/B is securely attached to the bottom of the NXT panel.  
Once the base is secured, side out the battery compartment and install the batteries into the  
battery base. Once the batteries are installed, close the compartment.  
Reconnect all rear connectors to the NXT panel.  
1. Complete the instructions for configuring the NetLinx Master for IP communication found in the  
2. Press the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to open the Setup page.  
3. Press the Battery Base button to open the Battery Base page (FIG. 80).  
FIG. 80 Battery Base page  
89  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
The battery base firmware is shown on the right of the Battery Base page.  
Verify you have downloaded the latest firmware file from www.amx.com and then  
save the Kit file to your computer.  
Step 2: Upgrade the NXA-BASE/B firmware via an IP  
1. Click on the OnLine Tree tab in the Workspace window to view the devices on the System.  
The default System value is one.  
2. Right-click the associated System number (from the Workspace) and select Refresh System to  
detect of all devices on the current system, establish a new connection to the Master, and refresh the  
System list with devices on that system.  
3. After the Communication Verification dialog window verifies active communication between the  
PC and the Master, verify the target panel appears in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace  
window. The default Modero panel value is 10001. The NXA-BASE/B will not appear on the system  
listing.  
4. Locate the latest Kit file by first logging in to www.amx.com and then navigate to Tech Center >  
Firmware Files and from within the Modero section of the web page locate the Modero Battery  
Base section of the website.  
5. Click on the desired Kit file link and after you’ve accepted the Licensing Agreement, verify you  
have downloaded the Modero Battery Base Kit file to a known location.  
6. From within Studio, select Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to NetLinx Device from the Main  
menu to open the Send to NetLinx Device dialog (FIG. 81). Verify the panel’s System and Device  
number values match those values listed within the System folder in the OnLine Tree tab of the  
Workspace window.  
Selected Battery Base Firmware file  
Description field for selected Kit file  
Firmware download  
status  
Device value and System number  
must match the values  
listed in the Workspace window  
FIG. 81 Send to NetLinx Device dialog (showing NXA-BASE/B firmware update via IP)  
7. Select the battery base’s Kit file (ending in VXX.kit) from the Files section (FIG. 81).  
90  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
8. Enter the Device value associated with the panel and the System number associated with the Master  
(listed in the OnLine Tree tab of the Workspace window). The Port field is greyed-out.  
The firmware for the battery base can not be downloaded directly. Download of the  
Kit file to the BASE/B is done through the panel. The procedures for updating  
firmware to the base are nearly identical to those for updating panel firmware, except  
that the Kit file selected must be that of the BASE/B.  
9. Click the Reboot Device checkbox. This causes the touch panel to reboot after the firmware update  
process is complete. The reboot of the panel can take up 30 seconds after the firmware process has  
finished.  
10. Click Send to begin the transfer. The file transfer progress is indicated on the bottom-right of the  
dialog (FIG. 81).  
11. Click Close on the Send to NetLinx dialog window (after the panel reboots) to return to the main  
program.  
12. Right-click the associated System number and select Refresh System. This causes a refresh of all  
project systems, establishes a new connection to the Master, and populates the System list with  
devices on your particular system.  
13. Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (below the LCD) for 3 seconds to access the  
Setup page.  
14. Press the Battery Base button to open the Battery Base page and confirm that the version is no  
longer 0.00.  
If the Base Version field displays 0.00, this means there was an error in the firmware  
download process. Re-install the base firmware and re-confirm that the new base  
version no longer reads 0.00.  
91  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Upgrading Modero Firmware  
92  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
This section describes each firmware page and their specific functional elements.  
Setup Navigation Buttons  
These Setup Navigation Buttons (FIG. 82) appear on the left of the panel screen when the Setup page is  
currently active.  
Modero Setup  
Navigation Buttons  
FIG. 82 Setup Navigation Buttons  
These Navigation Buttons are specific to these Modero panels and include the specific elements  
described in the following table:  
Setup Navigation Button Elements  
Project Information:  
Press the Project Information button to access the Project Information and view  
the TPD4 project file properties currently loaded on the selected panel  
(read-only).  
• Refer to the Project Information Page section on page 96 for more detailed  
information.  
Panel Information:  
Time Adjustment:  
Press the Panel Information button to access the Panel Information page and  
view panel specific information such as resolution, memory, etc. (read-only).  
• Refer to the Panel Information Page section on page 97 for more detailed  
information.  
Press the Time Adjustment button to access the Time Adjustment page where  
you can alter the time and date settings on the Master.  
• Refer to the Time & Date Setup Page section on page 98 for more detailed  
information.  
Audio Adjustments:  
Protected Setup:  
Press the Audio Adjustments button to access the Volume page where you can  
alter the audio parameters on the Modero panel.  
• Refer to the Volume Page section on page 99 for more detailed information.  
Press the Protected Setup button to access the Protected Setup page section  
that provides access to the panel’s sensors, calibration features, and  
connection settings.  
information.  
93  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Setup Navigation Button Elements (Cont.)  
Video Adjustment:  
Press the Video Adjustment button to access the Video Adjustment page where  
you can set the video properties for incoming video.  
• This button only appears on Color Video (CV) capable touch panels.  
for more detailed information.  
Battery Base:  
Press the Battery Base button to access the Battery Base page where you can  
modify and monitor NXT-BP Modero Power Pack parameters.  
• This button only appears when a Modero Table Top panel (NXT) is connected  
to an NXA-BASE/B battery base.  
• Refer to the Battery Base Page section on page 102 for more detailed  
information.  
Setup Page  
This page (FIG. 83) centers around basic Modero panel properties such as: Connection Status of the  
panel, Display Timeout, Inactivity Page Flip Time, Inactivity page file, and the Panel Brightness.  
Connection Status  
Red Connection Status icon -  
indicates no connection to a Master  
Green Connection Status icon -  
indicates communication to a Master  
Video Adjustment button doesn’t  
appear on Non-Video (CA) panels  
Battery Base button doesn’t appear  
until NXT is connected to a BASE/B  
FIG. 83 Setup page  
The elements of the Setup page are described in the table below:  
Setup Page Elements  
Exit:  
Returns you to the Main touch panel page. In this case, the previous page is the  
default Main page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
94  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Setup Page Elements (Cont.)  
Connection Status:  
Displays whether the panel is communicating externally, the encryption status  
of the communicating Master, what connection type is being used (Ethernet or  
USB), and what System the panel is a part of.  
This visual display of the connection status is also reflected at the upper-right of  
each firmware page. This allows the user to have a current visual update of the  
panel’s connection status regardless of what page is currently active.  
• When a connection is established, the message displayed is either:  
"Connected via Ethernet " or "Connected via USB ".  
• If no connection can be established by the Modero panel, it will continue to try  
and establish a connection while displaying: "Attempting via ...".  
• The word "Encrypted" appears only when an encrypted connection is  
established with a target Master.  
• The panel must be rebooted before incorporating any panel communication  
changes and detecting any active Ethernet connections.  
The Ethernet connection is not detected until after a reboot.  
Display/Panel Timeout:  
Sets the length of time the panel can remain idle before activating the sleep  
mode. When the device goes into sleep mode, the LCD is powered-down.  
• Press the UP/DN buttons to increase/decrease the time until the panel  
times out. Range = 0 - 240 minutes.  
• Use this button to set the timeout value to zero and disable the sleep mode.  
• Note: Display timeout values affect battery performance. Small timeout  
values increase the life of the battery charge. Greater timeout values  
may require more frequent battery charging.  
Inactivity Page Flip  
Timeout:  
Sets the number of minutes of inactivity before the panel automatically flips to a  
pre-selected touch panel page. When the device goes into this inactivity mode,  
the LCD does not power-down.  
• Press the UP/DN buttons to increase/decrease the time the panel can remain  
inactive before it flips to the preset page. Range = 0 - 240 minutes.  
• Use this button to set the timeout value to zero and disable the inactivity page  
flip mode.  
• The touch panel page used for the Inactivity page flip is shown within a small  
Inactivity Page field.  
Panel Brightness:  
Sets the display brightness level of the panel.  
• Press the UP/DN buttons to adjust the brightness level. Range = 0 - 100.  
• The on-screen bargraph can be dragged to adjust the Brightness level which  
is then reflected as a corresponding numeric value within the Panel  
Brightness field.  
95  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Project Information Page  
The Project Information page displays the TPDesign4 (TPD4) project file properties currently loaded on  
the selected Modero panel (FIG. 84). Refer to the TPDesign4 Touch Panel Program instruction manual  
for more specific information on uploading TPDesign4 files to a panel.  
Sample TPD4 Project Wizard dialog  
FIG. 84 Project Information page (shown taking information form TPD4 project file)  
The elements of the Project Information page are described in the table below:  
Project Information Page Elements  
Back:  
Returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
File Name:  
Displays the name of the TPDesign4 project file downloaded to the panel.  
Displays the designer information.  
Designer ID:  
File Revision:  
Dealer ID:  
Displays the revision number of the file.  
Displays the dealer ID number (unique to every dealer and entered in TPD4).  
Displays the job name.  
Job Name:  
Sales Order:  
Purchase Order:  
Build Number:  
Displays the sales order information.  
Displays the purchase order information.  
Displays the build number information of the TPD4 software used to create the  
project file.  
Creation Date:  
Revision Date:  
Last Save Date:  
Blink Rate:  
Displays the project creation date.  
Displays the last revision date for the project.  
Displays the last date the project was saved.  
Displays the feedback blink rate (10th of second).  
Job Comments:  
Displays any comments associated to the job. These comments are taken from  
the TPD4 project file.  
96  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Panel Information Page  
The Panel Information page (FIG. 85) centers around Modero panel properties such as: resolution used,  
on-board memory, firmware, address/channel information, and string information.  
This information is retrieved from  
the Modero panel  
FIG. 85 Panel Information page (takes its’ information from the touch panel)  
The elements of the Panel Information page are described in the table below:  
Panel Information Page Elements  
Back:  
Returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Panel Type:  
Displays the model of the Modero panel being used.  
Firmware Version:  
Displays the G4 firmware version being used by the panel.  
• Verify you have the latest version from www.amx.com.  
Displays the setup port information/value being used by the panel.  
Displays the high port (port count) value for the panel.  
Setup Port:  
High Port:  
High Address:  
High Channel:  
High Level:  
Displays the high address (address count) value for the panel.  
Displays the high channel (channel count) value for the panel.  
Displays the high level (level count) value being used by the panel.  
Displays the specific serial number value assigned to the panel.  
Displays the type and version of the Setup pages being used by the panel.  
Serial Number:  
Setup Pages Version:  
Screen Width:  
Displays the pixel width being used to display the incoming video signal on the  
Modero panel.  
• Maximum available screen width on 12" panels is 800 pixels.  
Screen Height:  
Displays the pixel height being used to display the incoming video signal on the  
Modero panel.  
• Maximum available screen height on 12" panels is 600 pixels.  
Screen Refresh Rate:  
Screen Rotation:  
Displays the video refresh rate applied to the incoming video signal from the  
panel.  
Displays the degree of rotation applied to the on-screen image.  
97  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Panel Information Page Elements (Cont.)  
Power Up Pages:  
Displays the first touch panel page assigned for display after the device is  
powered-up.  
• This information is taken from the TPD4 project file.  
• Most projects begin with a Main page.  
Start Up String:  
Wake Up String:  
Sleep String:  
File System:  
RAM:  
Displays the start-up string.  
Displays the wake up string used after an activation from a timeout.  
Displays the sleep string used during a panel’s sleep mode.  
Displays the amount of Compact Flash memory available on the Modero panel.  
Displays the available RAM (or Extended Memory module) on the Modero  
panel.  
Time & Date Setup Page  
The Time & Date Setup page (FIG. 86) allows you to alter/set the time and date information on the  
NetLinx Master. If either the Time/Date is modified on this page (then updated to the Master by pressing  
the Set Time button), all devices communicating to that target Master will then be updated to reflect the  
new information.  
Date Display  
fields  
Time Display  
fields  
Currently  
selected  
FIG. 86 Time and Date Setup page  
The only way to modify a panel’s time, without altering the Master, is to use NetLinx  
Code.  
The elements of the Time & Date Setup page are described in the table below:  
Time & Date Setup Page Elements  
Back:  
Returns you to the previously active touch panel page without saving changes  
(to save changes, use the Set Time button).  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Time Date Refresh/Set:  
This section provides you with two options:  
• The Get Time/Date button retrieves the Time and Date information from the  
Master.  
• The Set Time/Date button sets the Master to retain and save any  
time/date modifications made on the Time and Date Setup page.  
98  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Time & Date Setup Page Elements (Cont.)  
Time Display fields:  
• These fields display the time in three formats: STANDARD, STANDARD  
AM/PM, and 24 HOUR.  
Date Display fields:  
Set Date/Time:  
• These fields display the calendar date information in several different formats.  
This section provides a user with both UP/DN arrow buttons to alter the  
Master’s calendar date and time. The blue circle indicates which field is cur-  
rently selected.  
• Select the Year field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the year value  
(range = 2000 - 2037).  
• Select the Month field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the month value  
(range = 1 - 12).  
• Select the Day field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the day value  
(range = 1 - 31).  
• Select the Hour field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the hour value  
(24-hour military).  
• Select the Minute field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the minute value  
(range = 0 - 59).  
• Select the Second field and use the UP/DN buttons to alter the second value  
(range = 0 - 59).  
Modero touch panels do not have an on-board clock. This page both receives and  
sets the time/date of the NetLinx Master.  
Volume Page  
The Volume page (FIG. 87) (accessed by pressing the Audio Adjustments button on the Setup page)  
allows you to adjust the master volume parameters and default panel sounds on the panel.  
FIG. 87 Volume configuration page  
The elements of the Volume page are described in the table below:  
Volume Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
99  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Volume Page Elements (Cont.)  
Master Volume:  
This section allows you to alter the current master volume level:  
• Use the UP/DN buttons to adjust the volume level (range = 0 - 100).  
• The Master Volume bargraph indicates the current volume level.  
• The Mute button toggles the Mute feature.  
• The Play Test button plays a test WAV/MP3 file over the panel’s internal  
speakers.  
Default Panel Sounds:  
Internal Sound Level:  
Sets the Modero panel to play either the default Button Hit sound (when you  
touch an active button) and/or the default Button Miss sound (when you touch  
a non-active button or any area outside of the active button).  
This section allows you to adjust the current sound level on the internal panel  
speaker:  
• Use the UP/DN buttons to adjust the volume output on the internal speakers  
(range = 0 - 100).  
• The Internal Sound Level bargraph indicates the current sound level.  
• The Mute button mutes the volume.  
Line In Level:  
Mic Out Level:  
Allows you to adjust the current Line-In volume level (being received from the  
communicating breakout box).  
• Use the UP/DN buttons to adjust the Line-In volume level (range = 0 - 100).  
• The Line-In Level bargraph indicates the current Line-In level.  
• The Mute button mutes the Line-In volume.  
Allows you to adjust the current Microphone volume level (being received from  
the communicating breakout box).  
• Use the UP/DN buttons to adjust the Microphone volume level  
(range = 0 - 100).  
• The Mic Out Level bargraph indicates the current Mic Out level.  
Supported sampling rates for WAV  
The following is a listing of supported sampling rates associated for WAV files played on these panels.  
Some WAV files currently played on Modero's may not work on these panels. The supported sampling  
rates for WAV files are:  
Supported WAV Sampling Rates  
• 48000 Hz  
• 44100 Hz  
• 32000 Hz  
• 24000 Hz  
• 22050 Hz  
• 16000 Hz  
• 12000 Hz  
• 11025 Hz  
• 8000 Hz  
Protected Setup Page  
This button opens the Protected Setup page which centers around the properties used by the panel to  
properly communicate with the NetLinx Master. Refer to both the Protected Setup Navigation  
information.  
100  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Video Adjustment Slide-Out Option Bar  
Pressing the on-screen Video Adjustment button causes an option bar to slide outwards from the  
Navigation buttons (FIG. 88). This option bar within a 1200V panel provides you with one choice: Video  
Adjustment. The other two options (RGB Adjustment and Streaming Adjustment) are only available on  
a VG-Series panel and are greyed-out (inaccessible). Each of these options corresponds to an on-board  
slot position where the related components reside (as seen below). As an example: Composite video is  
available via slot 1 because of the location of associated components. Since these components are shared  
between the 1200V-Series and VG-Series panels, it is an option common to both. Refer to the following  
section for detailed information on this option.  
Slot 1  
Slot 2  
Slot 3  
FIG. 88 Video Adjustment Slide-Out Options Bar  
Video Adjustment - Video Adjustment Page  
The Video Adjustment page (FIG. 89) (accessed by pressing the Video Adjustment button on the Setup  
page and then selecting the appropriate button from the option bar) sets the Video properties of the  
incoming video signal from an NXA-AVB/RGB Breakout Box.  
Incoming Video signal  
Once done making your screen  
adjustments, SAVE SETTINGS.  
FIG. 89 Video Adjustment page (showing default values)  
The elements of the Video Adjustment page are described in the table below:  
Video Adjustment Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
101  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
       
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Video Adjustment Page Elements (Cont.)  
Settings:  
• The Default Settings button sets the video settings to their default values  
(indicated in this table).  
• The Undo Changes button disregards any changes made on the page since  
the last settings were saved.  
• The Save Settings button saves any changes made to this page.  
Video Settings:  
• The Black & White button toggles the Black & White display mode.  
Default = Off.  
• The Sharpness button toggles the Interpolate (Sharpness) feature.  
Default = On.  
• The Interlace button toggles the Interlacing feature.  
Default = On.  
Status:  
Displays whether or not a video-sync signal is detected.  
Format:  
Allows you to press this blue field and cycle through a choice of available video  
formats (NTSC, PAL, SECAM, or Auto detect).  
• Default = Auto.  
Brightness:  
Contrast:  
Saturation:  
Hue:  
Use the UP/DN buttons to alter the brightness level of the incoming signal.  
• Range = 0 - 255, default = 128.  
Use the UP/DN buttons to alter the contrast level of the incoming signal.  
• Range = 0 - 255, default = 128.  
Use the UP/DN buttons to alter the color saturation level of the incoming signal.  
• Range = 0 - 255, default = 128.  
Use the UP/DN buttons to alter the hue level of the incoming signal.  
• Range = 0 - 255, default = 128.  
Battery Base Page  
This page (FIG. 90) allows you to alter/set the power warning preferences, monitor battery status  
information, and alter the display times for the battery warnings. The fields on this page are populated  
with information after the panel is connected to an optional NXA-BASE/B Battery Base containing up to  
two NXT-BP batteries.  
FIG. 90 Battery Base page  
102  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
This page is ONLY available on Modero Table Top panels (NXT) using an NXA-BASE/B. The elements  
of the Battery Base page are described in the table below:  
Battery Base Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Charge Status:  
Time Remaining (blue) indicates the amount of charge time (use) remaining  
on the batteries within the connected NXA-BASE/B.  
Time Until Charged (green) indicates the amount of time remaining until the  
batteries installed within the connected NXA-BASE/B are fully charged.  
• Range = 0:00 - 12:59. This is read in HH:MM, hours and minutes.  
Panel Shutdown:  
Low Battery Warning:  
The Panel Shutdown UP/DN buttons alter the timeout value (in minutes).  
• This value determines the number of minutes that would need to pass before  
the panel automatically shuts-down.  
• Once shutdown, the unit would have to be restarted. A zero value disables  
this feature. Range = 0 - 240, default = 0 min.  
The Low Battery Warning UP/DN buttons alter the time value (in minutes)  
available on the battery (for use) before the panel displays a low battery  
warning.  
• Range - 10 - 45, default = 15 min.  
Very Low Battery Warning: The Very Low Battery Warning UP/DN buttons alter the time value  
(in minutes) available on the battery (for use) before the panel displays a very  
low battery warning. This indicates a near-term panel shutdown.  
Range = 3 - 15, default = 5 min.  
- This value can never exceed the Low Battery Warning value.  
When the NXT-BP batteries (installed within the NXA-BASE/B battery  
base) reach a point where they need to be recalibrated.  
- A recalibration pop-up screen appears to ask whether or not you choose  
to recalibrate the batteries at this time.  
Battery Status fields:  
This section provides the ability to monitor the current battery charge levels and  
charge qualities:  
• The Combined Charge Status bargraph indicates the combined power  
charge available from both internal battery connection slots  
(bargraph range = 0 - 100).  
• The Battery One Charge Status bargraph indicates the power charge  
available on the Slot 1 internal battery connection (bargraph range = 0 - 100).  
• The Battery One Quality bargraph indicates the physical capacity (quality) of  
the battery. Quality is the percentage of actual capacity vs. its rated capacity.  
For optimal performance, a battery should be replaced when the quality  
rating drops below 80%.  
• The Battery Two Charge Status bargraph indicates the power charge  
available on the Slot 2 internal battery connection (range = 0 - 100).  
• The Battery Two Quality bargraph indicates the physical capacity (quality) of  
the battery. Quality is the percentage of actual capacity vs. its rated capacity.  
• The Base Version field indicates the firmware version being used by the  
NXA-BASE/B Battery Base connected to the NXT Modero panel.  
• The Battery Level Port field indicates the port being used to report the  
combined charge status level back to the NetLinx Master on (set in TPD4).  
• The Battery Level field indicates the level being used to report the combined  
charge status level back to the NetLinx Master on (set in TPD4).  
103  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Battery Base Page Elements (Cont.)  
Battery Power Brightness The DISABLE/DISABLED button acts as a power save feature with two  
Limit:  
available choices:  
Disable - activates the brightness limit set on the Modero panel and is used  
to conserve battery power. Activating this feature causes the panel to  
function at 80% of full brightness and overrides the Panel Brightness value  
set on the Setup page. This extends the battery usage time.  
Disabled - (illuminated when selected) deactivates this power save feature  
and makes the panel use the specified Panel Brightness level set on the  
Setup page.  
The term "quality" (in the context of a battery), refers to the current capacity relative to  
the batteries’ rated capacity. For example, after constant use, a battery may be  
operating at 75% of its rated capacity even though it might be fully charged. In this  
case, the battery could be incorrectly reporting its’ information back to the battery  
base and then consequently relating this information back to the Battery Base page.  
A battery can be recalibrated using an optional NXT-CHG (battery charger).  
Protected Setup Navigation Buttons  
The Protected Setup Navigation Buttons (FIG. 91) appear on the left of the panel screen when the  
Protected Setup page is currently active.  
Modero Protected  
Setup Navigation  
Buttons  
FIG. 91 Protected Setup Navigation Buttons  
104  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
These Navigation Buttons are specific to these Modero panels and include the panel specific elements  
described in the following table:  
Protected Setup Navigation Button Elements  
G4 Web Control:  
Press the G4 Web Control button to access the G4 Web Control page where  
you can enable or disable display and control of your panel (via the web) by a  
PC running a VNC client.  
page 74 for more detailed information.  
Sensors:  
Press the Sensors button to access the Sensors Setup page where you can  
modify/monitor both the light and motion sensor settings.  
• Refer to the Sensor Setup Page section on page 110 for more detailed  
information.  
Passwords:  
Calibrate:  
Press the Passwords button to access the Passwords Setup page where you  
can specify up to five security passwords. Default password is 1988.  
• Refer to the Password Setup Page section on page 112 for more detailed  
information.  
Press the Calibrate button to access the Calibration page where you can use  
the displayed set of crosshairs to calibrate a touch panel.  
• Refer to the Calibration Page section on page 113 for more detailed  
information.  
Wireless Settings:  
Press the Wireless Settings button to access the Wireless Settings page where  
you can setup the wireless connection parameters used by the  
NXA-PCI80211G wireless card located within the Modero panel.  
• Refer to the Wireless Settings Page section on page 114 for more detailed  
information.  
System Settings:  
Press the System Settings button to access the System Settings page where  
you can alter the communication parameters of both the NetLinx Master and  
Modero panel.  
• Refer to the System Settings Page section on page 118 for more detailed  
information.  
Protected Setup Page  
The Protected Setup page (FIG. 92) centers around the properties used by the panel to properly  
communicate with the NetLinx Master. Enter the factory default password (1988) into the password  
keypad to access this page.  
Provides access to the panel firmware  
pages by enabling the grey front  
setup access button:  
- Setup page (after a 3 second press/hold)  
- Calibration page (after a 6 second  
press/hold)  
FIG. 92 Protected Setup page-showing default values  
105  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
The elements of the Protected Setup page are described in the table below:  
Protected Setup Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Device Number:  
Options:  
Opens a keypad that is used to set and display the current device number.  
Allows you to select various touch panel features:  
• The Function Show button enables the display of the channel port and  
channel code in the top left corner of the button, the level port and level code  
in the bottom left corner, and the address port and address code in the  
bottom right corner (see FIG. 94 for an example of the function locations).  
• Use the Page Tracking button to toggle page tracking. When enabled, the  
touch panel sends page data back to the NetLinx Master, or vice versa  
depending on the touch panel settings.  
• Use the Telnet button to enable or disable the telnet server on the panel. This  
feature focuses on direct telnet communication to the panel.  
• Use the Front Button Setup Access button to activate the grey Front Setup  
Access button (located below the LCD) to access the firmware pages.  
- Default condition is On.  
- Press and hold this grey button for 3 seconds to access the Setup page.  
- Press and hold this grey button for 6 seconds to access the Calibration  
page.  
Reboot Panel:  
Pressing this button causes the panel to restart after saving any changes.  
System Recovery:  
Allows you to either reset the touch panel to factory default settings and/or wipe  
out all existing touch panel pages:  
• The Reset System Settings button allows a user to wipe out all current  
configuration parameters on the touch panel (such as IP Addresses, Device  
Number assignments, Passwords, and other presets).  
- Pressing this button launches a Confirmation dialog (FIG. 93) which asks  
you to confirm your selection.  
- This dialog is configured with a delay timer that does not enable the YES  
button for 5 seconds. This delay provides an additional amount of time for  
the user to confirm their decision.  
• The Remove User Pages button allows you remove all current TPD4 touch  
panel pages currently on the panel (including the pre-installed AMX Demo  
pages).  
- Pressing this button launches a Confirmation dialog (FIG. 93) which asks  
you to confirm your selection.  
- This dialog is configured with a delay timer that does not enable the YES  
button for 5 seconds. This delay provides an additional amount of time for  
the user to confirm their decision.  
106  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Protected Setup Page Elements (Cont.)  
Keyboard Layout:  
(build 2.60 or higher)  
Displays the listing of supported international keyboard settings. The following  
list allows the end-user to specify which international keyboard is being  
connected to the Modero touch panel and then which characters should be  
reflected within the G4 Computer Control and TakeNote applications:  
- None (default), Spanish, Italian, French, German, Swiss, UK, and US  
Note: You must be using a standard 101 button keyboard to accurately  
utilize this feature.  
• Modero uses the open-source VNC character standards to transmit the  
character information to a target device such as a PC.  
• One of the issues which occurred in the past was that some 101-key foreign  
keyboard character sets were being incorrectly represented via the Computer  
Control and Take Note applications.  
• For example: Spanish keyboards consisting of Castilian character sets such  
as tilde (é) were being miscommunicated by the VNC application to the  
source computer and as a result, passwords were not properly being entered.  
• The VNC - Computer Control keyboard drivers found in earlier Modero  
firmware (build 57 or earlier) were using an English type/character set which  
was not fully utilizing all available foreign characters.  
• Several different countries have produced 101-key international keyboards,  
each with their own unique set of keys occupying the keyboard. Several of  
these keys are specific to the language they are used with.  
You have a wait time of 5 seconds  
before the YES option is enabled.  
FIG. 93 Protected Setup page-System Recovery confirmation dialog  
Channel Code  
Number  
Channel Port  
Channel Code  
Number  
Channel Port  
7,10  
Slider  
3,132  
2,8  
Address  
Address  
Port  
Port  
Button  
Level Port  
Level Port  
3,50  
4,9  
1,8  
Channel Code  
Number  
Channel Code  
Number  
Address Code  
Number  
Address Code  
Number  
FIG. 94 Button/slider Function Show example  
107  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
G4 Web Control Page  
The G4 Web Control page (FIG. 95) centers around enabling and disabling both the display and control  
of your panel (via the web). An external PC running a VNC client (installed during the initial  
communication to the G4 panel) makes this possible.  
FIG. 95 G4 Web Control page  
Each panel supports the open standard Virtual Network Computing (VNC) interface. These panels  
contain a VNC server that allows them to accept a connection from any other device running a VNC  
client. Once a connection is established to that target device, the client can control the touch panel  
remotely. The elements of the G4 Web Control page are described in the table below:  
G4 Web Control Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
108  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
G4 Web Control Page Elements (Cont.)  
G4 Web Control Settings: Sets the IP communication values for the touch panel and contains:  
Enable/Enabled  
• The Enable/Enabled button allows you to toggle between the two G4  
activation settings:  
- Enable - deactivates the G4 Web Control feature on the panel.  
- Enabled - activates the G4 Web Control feature on the panel and allows  
an external PC running a VNC client to access the panel (after the  
remaining fields are configured).  
Network Interface Select  
Displays the detected method of communication to the web:  
Wired is used when a direct Ethernet connection is being used for  
communication to the web. This is a default setting if no wireless interface  
card is detected by the panel.  
Wireless is used when a wireless card is detected within the internal card  
slot. This method provides an indirect communication to the web via a  
pre-configured Wireless Access Point.  
Web Control Name  
Allows you to enter a unique alpha-numeric string that is used as the display  
name of the panel within the Manage WebControl Connections window of the  
new NetLinx Security browser window.  
• This Web Control tab displays a G4 icon alongside the link to the Web Control  
Name given to this panel (FIG. 96).  
Web Control Password  
Web Control Port  
Allows you to enter the G4 Authentication session password associated for  
VNC web access of this panel.  
Allows you to enter the port value that the VNC Web Server runs on.  
• Default value is 5900.  
Maximum Number of  
Connections  
This read-only field displays the maximum number of users that can be  
simultaneously connected to the target panel via the web.  
• Default value is 1.  
Current Connection Count This read-only field displays the current number of users connected to the  
target panel via the web. This value cannot exceed the Maximum number field.  
G4 Web Control Timeout:  
Sets the length of time (in minutes) the panel can remain idle (no cursor  
movements) before the session is closed and the user is disconnected.  
• Minimum value = 0 minutes (panel never times-out)  
• Maximum value = 240 minutes (panel times-out after 240 minutes/4hours)  
FIG. 96 Sample relationship between G4 Web Control and Mange WebControl Connections window  
instructions on how to use the G4 Web Control page with the new web-based NetLinx Security  
application.  
109  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Sensor Setup Page  
The Sensor Setup page (FIG. 97) allows you to adjust the Light and Motion Sensor parameters on a  
Modero touch panel.  
FIG. 97 Sensor Setup page  
A light level value between the Minimum and Maximum DIM Mode values delivers an  
average light level. The DIM mode Min Level can never exceed the DIM Mode Max  
Level.  
The elements of the Sensor Setup page are described in the table below:  
Sensor Setup Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
Light Sensor:  
Allows you to monitor and alter the sensitivity of the Modero panel light sensor:  
• The Light Sensor Level field indicates the level used to report the light  
sensor level back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4) (read-only).  
• The Light Sensor Level Port field indicates the port used to report the light  
sensor level back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4) (read-only).  
• The Light Sensor Channel field indicates the level used to report the sensor  
channel back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4). It is On when you are  
below the Maximum dim mode level (read-only).  
• The Light Sensor Channel Port field indicates the port used to report the  
sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4) (read-only).  
• The Light Level field provides a numeric value representing the current value  
of the light level detected by the on-board photo-sensor.  
• The Light Level bargraph displays a horizontal bargraph indicating the current  
value of the light level detected by the on-board photo-sensor. This bargraph  
provides a visual representation of the numeric value displayed within the  
Light Level field.  
• Use the Dim Mode Max Level bargraph to alter the Maximum DIM level  
value used to activate the DIM Mode Brightness Level (range = 0 - 100).  
• Use the Dim Mode Min Level bargraph to alter the Minimum DIM level value  
used to activate the DIM Mode Brightness Level (range = 0 - 100).  
- The position of this bargraph can never exceed that of the Dim Mode  
Max Level.  
110  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Sensor Setup Page Elements (Cont.)  
Motion Sensor:  
Provides the following fields:  
• The Motion Detection field displays a reactive button that changes color  
(illuminates) and displays the words "Motion Detected" when motion is  
detected by the Modero panel’s front motion sensor.  
• The Motion Sensor Port field indicates the port used to report the motion  
sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4) (read-only).  
• The Motion Sensor Channel field indicates the channel used to report the  
motion sensor channel back to the NetLinx Master (set in TPD4) (read-only).  
Wake Panel On Motion  
Sense:  
The Wake Panel Sensitivity relates to the sensitivity of the motion sensor to  
detect motion and wake the panel accordingly.  
Toggle the Enable/Enabled button to either active/inactive this feature:  
- Enable - activates this feature. Activating this feature reactivates the  
panel from a panel timeout (sleep) mode.  
- Enabled - (illuminated when selected) deactivates this feature and  
makes the panel use the specified Display Timeout value set on the  
Setup Page.  
• Use the Wake Panel UP/DN buttons to alter the sensitivity value.  
- Range = 0 - 100.  
• The horizontal WAKE PANEL SENSITIVITY bargraph indicates the current  
motion sensitivity value associated with waking the panel from a timeout.  
Dim Mode Minimum  
Brightness:  
Allows you to alter the sensitivity of the Modero panel light sensor:  
Toggle the Enable/Enabled button to either active/inactive the DIM Mode  
feature:  
- Enable - activates this feature. Once active (by receiving a value below the  
Dim Mode Min Level value), the current light level ramps to the DIM Mode  
value within a few seconds.  
- Enabled - (illuminated when selected) deactivates this feature.  
• Use the DIM Mode Brightness UP/DN buttons to alter the DIM level.  
- Range = 0 - 100.  
- The lower the value, the darker a room must be before the LCD Brightness  
value changes to conform to a DIM room (and vice versa with a  
higher value).  
• The DIM Mode Minimum Brightness bargraph indicates the current DIM  
Mode Brightness level.  
- This level corresponds to the brightness level of the LCD used when  
the DIM Mode is active.  
- The Brightness value of the panel in a DIM room (low-light) is much  
less than that of a Non-DIM (well to brightly-lit) where the LCD Brightness  
must be higher to display the screen content clearly.  
There is a relationship between the motion sensor and the panel sleep feature. If a  
panel is set to Sleep Mode, there is a time delay before the motion sensor is activated  
to detect motion. By creating a time delay to the detection, this allows a user to set  
the sleep mode and leave the panels’ detection range. In this way, the panel doesn’t  
awake immediately after the sleep is active and you move away.  
Using the Automated Brightness Control feature (DIM Mode)  
Please follow the steps below to set up Automated Brightness Control:  
1. Set the lighting conditions in the room to maximum (turn On all the lights).  
2. Set the Maximum Panel Brightness, from the Setup page, to a comfortable level.  
Sitting in front of the panel, you should be able to comfortably see someone sitting  
behind the panel without being “blinded” by the panel.  
111  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
3. Open the Sensors Setup page (FIG. 97 on page 110) from the Protected Setup menu section.  
4. Move around the panel and block the direct or indirect light from the room fixtures with your body.  
Take note of the drop in the lighting level being detected by the panel in response to your  
movements.  
5. Set the Maximum brightness of the Dimmer (Dim Mode Max Level) below the detected drop. This  
will make sure that the panel does not react to variations in the lighting conditions of a normal  
working environment.  
The maximum (upper level) of the dimmer should be at least 15% lower than the  
maximum detected level.  
6. Set the minimum lighting conditions in the room (not complete darkness but the minimal lighting  
setup, unless complete darkness is an “operational option” for the room).  
7. Set the Minimum Dimmer Brightness (Dim Mode Min Level) to a comfortable level by sitting in  
front of the panel. You should be able to comfortably see someone sitting behind the panel without  
being “blinded” by the panel.  
8. Move around the panel and block the direct or indirect light from the room fixtures with your body.  
Take note of the drop in the lighting level being detected by the panel in response to your  
movements.  
9. Set the Minimum brightness of the Dimmer (Dim Mode Max Level) below the detected drop. This  
will make sure that the panel does not react to variations in the lighting conditions of a normal  
working environment.  
The minimum (lower level) of the dimmer should be at least 10% lower than the  
minimum detected level (ex: lower dimmer level at 30% if the detected lighting of the  
room is at 40%).  
Password Setup Page  
The Password Setup page (FIG. 98) centers around the properties used to assign passwords for the  
Modero panel pages.  
FIG. 98 Password Setup page  
112  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
The elements of the Password Setup page are described in the table below:  
Password Setup Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
In Panel Password  
Change:  
Accesses the alphanumeric values associated to particular password sets.  
• PASSWORD 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (protected) buttons open a keyboard where you can  
enter alphanumeric values associated to a selected password group.  
• Clearing Password #5 removes the need to enter a password before  
accessing the Protected Setup page.  
Calibration Page  
This page (FIG. 99) allows you to calibrate the input touch device (touch panel) using the  
pre-selected touch driver.  
Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button (below the Modero LCD) for  
6 seconds to access the Calibration page.  
Press the crosshairs to calibrate the panel and return to the last active firmware page.  
The request to touch the crosshairs  
is the first on-screen message  
Calibration successful is the second  
on-screen message that appears  
after the calibration process is  
completed  
On-screen crosshairs used for  
calibration of the touch device  
FIG. 99 Calibration page (actually 3 separate screens)  
If the calibration was improperly set and you cannot return to the Calibration  
page (through the panel’s firmware); you can access this firmware page via  
G4 WebControl where you can navigate to the Protected Setup page and press the  
Calibrate button through your VNC window.  
This action causes the panel to go to the Calibration page seen above, where you  
can physically recalibrate the actual touch panel again using the above procedures.  
113  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Wireless Settings Page  
The Wireless Settings page (FIG. 100) sets the communication information for the installed wireless  
interface card. This information includes its corresponding IP communication parameters, wireless  
communication settings, and read the device number assigned to the Modero panel. These panels can use  
the NXA-PCI80211G wireless card for wireless communication. This card also supports Wired  
Encryption Protocol (WEP) encryption of 64-bit and 128-bit key lengths. Refer to both the Wireless  
Connection section on page 60 for more detailed information of setting up the Modero panel for wireless  
network access.  
IP Settings section  
Wireless Settings section  
Red fields are user-editable  
Blue fields cycle through choices  
Grey fields are read-only  
FIG. 100 Wireless Settings page (showing default values)  
The elements of the Wireless Settings page are described in the table below:  
Wireless Settings Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
IP Settings:  
Sets the IP communication values for the touch panel and contains:  
Sets the panel to either DHCP or Static communication modes.  
DHCP/STATIC  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) assigns IP Addresses to client  
stations logging onto a TCP/IP network from a DHCP server.  
Static IP is a permanent IP Address that is assigned to a node in a TCP/IP  
network.  
Note: If DHCP is selected, the following fields become read-only: IP Address,  
Subnet Mask, Gateway, Primary DNS, Secondary DNS, and Domain.  
IP Address  
Sets the secondary IP Address assigned to the panel.  
Sets a subnetwork address to the panel.  
Subnet Mask  
Subnetwork mask is the technique used by the IP protocol to filter messages  
into a particular network segment (subnet).  
114  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Wireless Settings Page Elements (Cont.)  
IP Settings (Cont.):  
Gateway  
Sets a gateway value to the panel.  
Gateway is a computer that either performs protocol conversion between  
different types of networks/applications or acts as a go-between for two or  
more networks that use the same protocols.  
Host Name  
Sets the host name of the panel.  
• PRIMARY DNS sets the address of the primary DNS server being used by the  
Modero panel for host name lookups.  
- DNS (Domain Name System) is software that lets users locate computers  
on a local network or the Internet (TCP/IP network) by host and domain. The  
DNS server maintains a database of host names for its’ domain and their  
corresponding IP Addresses.  
• SECONDARY DNS sets the secondary DNS value to the panel.  
Primary DNS  
Sets the address of the primary DNS server used by the panel for host name  
lookups.  
Secondary DNS  
Domain  
Sets the secondary DNS value to the Modero panel.  
Sets the unique name on the Internet to the panel for DNS look-up.  
MAC Address  
This value is factory set by the manufacturer of the wireless mini-PCI Ethernet  
card.  
Access Point MAC  
Address:  
This value is factory set by the manufacturer of the Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
• When communicating with a WAP200G enter the MAC Address (BSSID) of  
the target WAP as the Access Point MAC Address. Refer to the WAP200G  
Instruction Manual for more detailed information on the interaction between  
these two product lines.  
Wireless Settings:  
Sets the communication values for the NXA-PCI80211G mini-PCI wireless  
communication card installed within the Modero panel.  
Network Name (SSID)  
Provides the Service Set Identifier (SSID), required by the panel, before it is  
permitted to join the wireless network. The SSID is the unique name used on  
the WAP and assigned to all panels in a wireless network that are communicat-  
ing to the same target WAP.  
• It is case sensitive and must not exceed 32 characters, which may be any  
keyboard character. Make sure this setting is the same for all points in your  
wireless network.  
• This unique string identifies the network and is the same string for all users on  
the same network.  
Authentication  
Toggles between the two authentication modes: Open System or Shared Key:  
• An Open system network allows connections from any client without  
authenticating whether that client has permission to associate with the  
network.  
• A Shared key network requires the client to submit a key which is shared by  
the network Wireless Access Point before it is given permission to associate  
with the network. In this case the key is the same as the WEP encryption  
key.  
• In both cases, even after association has taken place, if WEP encryption has  
also been enabled then the client will still require the WEP key to encrypt and  
decrypt packets in order to communicate successfully with the network.  
115  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Wireless Settings Page Elements (Cont.)  
Wireless Settings (Cont.):  
Encryption  
Cycles through the available encryption options: Clear Text, WEP64, and  
WEP128. Wired Equivalent Privacy is an 802.11 security protocol for wireless  
networks. The WEP encryption method is designed to provide the "equivalent"  
security available in wireline networks.  
Clear Text causes network packets to be sent out as unencrypted text.  
WEP64 enables WEP encryption at 64-bits. In this case all packets will be  
transmitted with their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key.  
WEP128 enables WEP encryption at 128-bits. All packets are transmitted  
with their contents encrypted using the Default WEP Key.  
• If the key is not the correct size, the system will resize it to match the number  
of bits required for the WEP encryption mode selected.  
Generate (Passphrase)  
Pressing the Generate button displays an on-screen keyboard which allows  
you to enter a passphrase and then AUTOMATICALLY generate all four WEP  
keys which are compatible only among Modero panels.  
Note: The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key  
generation formula. Therefore, this same Passphrase generates identical  
keys when done on any Modero because they all use the same  
Modero-specific generator. The Passphrase generator is case sensitive.  
Take these WEP keys and enter them into the target WAP. When also working  
with multiple panels, these WEP Keys (identical across all Modero panels)  
must be entered manually into the target WAP.  
• Once all panels have been setup in this way, these WEP keys can then be  
entered into the associated Wireless Access Point for ease of installation.  
• The Passphrase generator is unique to Modero panels. The Key generator on  
these Modero panels are specific and do not generate the same keys as  
other external non-AMX wireless devices.  
- Example: If you enter the word apple into the Passphrase generator on a  
3rd-party Wireless Access Point, it comes back with 1a:2b:3c:4d:etc.  
Entering the same apple in the Passphrase generator of any Modero panel  
generates a different key: a1:b2:c3:d4:etc. Only AMX Modero panels  
generate the same Current Key by using a unique Passphrase key  
generation technology. A Current Key string, when generated anywhere  
else, will not match those created on the Modero panels.  
Note: The code key generator on Modero panels use the same key generation  
formula.The passphrase generator is case sensitive.  
Default Key  
Cycles through the four available WEP key identifiers in order to select a WEP  
key to use. As the Default Key value is altered (through selection) the  
corresponding Current Key is displayed. Each of these corresponds to a WEP  
key.  
• This feature is useful for accessing different networks without having to  
re-enter that networks’ WEP key.  
• It is also sometimes used to set up a rotating key schedule to provide an extra  
layer of security.  
116  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Wireless Settings Page Elements (Cont.)  
Wireless Settings (Cont.):  
WEP Keys  
This feature provides you with another level of security by selecting a Key  
value.  
• A single button is available for each WEP key up to a maximum of four keys.  
• Pushing any of these buttons brings up an on-screen keyboard. Keys should  
be entered in hexadecimal notation. It is common practice for every two  
characters (representing a single byte) to be separated by a colon.  
• Press Done to accept any changes and save the new value.  
Ex: 01:0A:67:F3:56, although this is not necessary and the key may be  
entered by omitting the colons. A 64-bit key will be 10 characters in length  
while a 128-bit key will be 26 characters in length. The length of the key  
entered determines the level of WEP encryption employed.  
Either 64-bit or 128-bit.  
• 128-bit keys may also be entered and are used if supported by the internal  
wireless card.  
Current Key  
Displays the current WEP key in use. Keys may also be examined by touching  
the key buttons and noting the keyboard initialization text.  
• When working with a single panel and a single WAP, it is recommended that  
you manually enter the Current Key from the WAP into the selected WEP  
Key.  
• When working with a single WAP and multiple panels, it is recommended that  
you generate a Current Key using the same passphrase on all panels and  
then enter the panel-produced WEP key manually into the Wireless Access  
Point.  
Channel  
The RF channel being used for connection to the WAP (read -only).  
• This is determined through the WAP.  
Link Quality  
Displays the current quality of the link (as descriptive colored text) from the  
wireless NIC to the Wireless Access Point in real time.  
• The bargraph has been replaced with a descriptions: None, Poor, Fair,  
Good, Very Good, and Excellent. Green color text indicates better  
communication quality.  
• It reports the quality of the signal over the air (direct sequence spread  
spectrum). Even when the link quality is at its lowest you still have a  
connection and with it the ability to transmit and receive data, even if at much  
lower speeds.  
Note: Both Link Quality and Signal Strength are applicable to the RF  
connection only. It is quite possible to have an RF signal to a Wireless Access  
Point but be unable to communicate with it because of either incorrect IP or  
encryption settings.  
Signal Strength  
SNR (Signal Noise Ratio) is a measure of the relative strength of a wireless RF  
connection. This indicator displays a description of the signal strength from the  
Wireless Access Point connection.  
• The bargraph has been replaced with a descriptions: None, Poor, Fair,  
Good, Very Good, and Excellent. Green color text indicates better signal  
strength.  
• Given this value and the link quality above, a user can determine the noise  
level component of SNR.  
Ex: If the signal strength is high but the link quality is low then the cause of the  
link degradation is noise. However, if the signal strength is low and the link  
quality is low the cause would simply be signal strength.  
117  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
Wireless Settings Page Elements (Cont.)  
Wireless Settings (Cont.):  
Data Rate  
The data rate (in Mbps) at which the panel is currently communicating with a  
target WAP at (dynamic).  
• As you move closer to the target WAP (and both the signal strength/  
quality), the data rate increases and as the quality degrades this rate  
decreases.  
• Data rates for 802.11g communication are: 1, 2, 5.5, 11, and 54 Mbps.  
• Ex: 802.11g has a max data rate is 54 Mbps.  
System Settings Page  
The System Settings page (FIG. 101) sets the Secondary DNS Address information with its  
corresponding IP communication parameters, NetLinx Master communication settings, and reads the  
device number assigned to the Modero panel.  
IP Settings section  
Master Connection section  
(NetLinx Master properties)  
Master Connection features are not  
saved until the panel is rebooted  
Red fields are user-editable  
Blue fields cycle through choices  
Grey fields are read-only  
FIG. 101 System Settings page showing default values (reads and assigns values to the panel and Master)  
The elements of the System Settings page are described in the table below:  
System Settings Page Elements  
Back:  
Saves the changes and returns you to the previously active touch panel page.  
Connection Status icon:  
This visual display of the connection status allows the user to have a current  
visual update of the panel’s connection status regardless of what page is  
currently active.  
• A Lock only appears on the icon if the panel has established a connection  
with a currently secured target Master (requiring a username and password).  
IP Settings:  
Sets the IP communication values for the panel and contains:  
Sets the panel to either DHCP or Static communication modes.  
DHCP/Static  
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) assigns IP Addresses from  
client stations logging onto a TCP/IP network via a DHCP server.  
Static IP is a permanent IP Address that is assigned to a node in a TCP/IP  
network.  
IP Address  
Sets the secondary IP Address assigned to the panel.  
Sets a subnetwork address to the panel.  
Subnet Mask  
Subnetwork mask is the technique used by the IP protocol to filter messages  
into a particular network segment (Subnet).  
118  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
System Settings Page Elements (Cont.)  
Wireless Settings (Cont.):  
Gateway  
Sets a gateway value to the panel.  
Gateway is a computer that either performs protocol conversion between  
different types of networks/applications or acts as a go-between two or more  
networks that use the same protocols.  
Host Name  
Sets the host name of the panel.  
Primary DNS  
Sets the address of the primary DNS server used for host name lookups.  
DNS (Domain Name System) is software that lets users locate computers on  
a local network or the Internet (TCP/IP network) by host and domain. The  
DNS server maintains a database of host names for its’ domain and their  
corresponding IP Addresses.  
Secondary DNS  
Domain  
Sets a secondary DNS value to the panel.  
Sets the unique name on the Internet to the panel for DNS look-up.  
• The panel belongs to the DNS domain.  
Ethernet Mode  
MAC Address  
Sets the speed of the Ethernet connection to the panel.  
• Choices are: Auto, 10 Half Duplex, 10 Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or  
100 Full Duplex.  
Displays a read-only field that is factory set by AMX for the built-in Ethernet  
interface.  
Master Connection:  
Sets the NetLinx Master communication values:  
Type  
Sets the NetLinx Master to communicate with the panel via either USB or  
Ethernet. This is based on the cable connection from the rear.  
ICSNet is not a supported option on this panel.  
Ethernet is a CAT-5 cable (10/100Base T terminated in an RJ-45 connector)  
used to network computers together and is used in most LAN (local area  
networks). This description is also used to refer to both wired and wireless  
communication.  
USB option cannot be used on Modero panels which are not equipped with a  
rear USB port.  
Mode  
Cycles between the different connection modes (URL, Listen, and Auto)  
(ETHERNET Only - disabled when USB is selected)  
URL - In this mode, enter the IP/URL, Master Port Number, and  
username/password (if used) on the Master.  
- The System Number field is read-only because the panel obtains this  
information from the communicating Master.  
Listen - In this mode, add the Modero panel address into the URL List in  
NetLinx Studio and set the connection mode to Listen. This mode allows the  
Modero touch panel to "listen" for the Master’s communication signals.  
- The System Number and Master IP/URL fields are red-only.  
Auto - In this mode, enter the System Number and a username/password  
(if applicable). This mode is used when both the panel and the NetLinx  
Master are on the same Subnet and the Master has its UDP feature enabled.  
- Master IP/URL field is read-only.  
System Number  
Master IP/URL  
Allows you to enter a system number. Default value is 0 (zero).  
(ETHERNET Only - disabled when USB is selected)  
Sets the Master IP or URL of the NetLinx Master.  
(ETHERNET Only - disabled when USB is selected)  
Master Port Number  
Allows you to enter the port number used with the NetLinx Master.  
• Default value is 1319. (ETHERNET Only - disabled when USB is selected)  
Username/Password  
If the target Master has been previously secured, enter the alpha-numeric string  
(into each field) assigned to a pre-configured user profile on the Master.  
This profile should have the pre-defined level of access/configuration rights.  
119  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Firmware Pages and Descriptions  
information on using the System Settings page.  
120  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Programming  
You can program the touch panel, using the commands in this section, to perform a wide variety of  
operations using Send_Commands and variable text commands.  
A device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with values for the Device:  
Port: System (in all programming examples - Panel is used in place of these values and represents all  
Modero panels).  
Verify you are using the latest NetLinx Master and Modero touch panel firmware.  
Verify you are also using the latest version of TPDesign4.  
Button Assignments  
• Button Channel Range: 1 - 4000 Button push and Feedback (per address port)  
• Button Variable Text range: 1 - 4000 (per address port)  
• Button States Range: 1 - 256  
(0 = All states, for General buttons 1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
• Level Range: 1 - 600 (Default level value 0 - 255, can be set up to 1 - 65535)  
• Address port Range: 1 - 100  
These button assignments can only be adjusted in TPD4 and not on the panels  
themselves.  
Page Commands  
These Page Commands are used in NetLinx Programming Language and are case insensitive.  
Page Commands  
@APG  
Add the popup page to a group if it does not already exist. If the new popup is added to a  
group which has a popup displayed on the current page along with the new pop-up, the  
displayed popup will be hidden and the new popup will be displayed.  
Add a specific  
popup page to a  
specified popup  
group.  
Syntax:  
"'@APG-<popup page name>;<popup group name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@APG-Popup1;Group1'"  
Adds the popup page ’Popup1’ to the popup group ’Group1’.  
@CPG  
Syntax:  
Clear all popup  
pages from  
specified popup  
group.  
"'@CPG-<popup group name>'"  
Variable:  
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@CPG-Group1'"  
Clears all popup pages from the popup group ’Group1’.  
121  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Programming  
Page Commands (Cont.)  
@DPG  
Syntax:  
Delete a specific  
popup page from  
specified popup  
group if it exists.  
"'@DPG-<popup page name>;<popup group name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
popup group name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup group.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@DPG-Popup1;Group1'"  
Deletes the popup page ’Popup1’ from the popup group ’Group1’.  
@PDR  
If the flag is set, the popup will return to its default location on show instead of its last drag  
location.  
Set the popup  
location reset flag. Syntax:  
"'@PDR-<popup page name>;<reset flag>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
reset flag = 1 = Enable reset flag  
0 = Disable reset flag  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PDR-Popup1;1'"  
Popup1 will return to its default location when turned On.  
Syntax:  
@PHE  
Set the hide effect  
for the specified  
popup page to the  
named hide effect.  
"'@PHE-<popup page name>;<hide effect name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
hide effect name = Refers to the popup effect names being used.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHE-Popup1;Slide to Left'"  
Sets the Popup1 hide effect name to ’Slide to Left’.  
@PHP  
Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect; however, the command will specify both.  
This command sets the location at which the effect will end at.  
Set the hide effect  
position.  
Syntax:  
"'@PHP-<popup page name>;<x coordinate>,<y coordinate>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHP-Popup1;75,0'"  
Sets the Popup1 hide effect x-coordinate value to 75 and the y-coordinate value to 0.  
@PHT  
Syntax:  
Set the hide effect  
time for the  
specified popup  
page.  
"'@PHT-<popup page name>;<hide effect time>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
hide effect time = Given in 1/10ths of a second.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PHT-Popup1;50'"  
Sets the Popup1 hide effect time to 5 seconds.  
122  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Page Commands (Cont.)  
@PPA  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used. Same as the ’Clear Page’ command  
in TPDesign4.  
Close all popups  
on a specified  
page.  
Syntax:  
"'@PPA-<page name>'"  
Variable:  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPA-Page1'"  
Close all popups on Page1.  
@PPF  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is  
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as  
the ’Hide Popup’ command in TPDesign4.  
Deactivate a  
specific popup  
page on either a  
specified page or  
the current page.  
Syntax:  
"'@PPF-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPF-Popup1;Main'"  
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPF-Popup1'"  
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.  
@PPG  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). Toggling refers to the  
activating/deactivating (On/Off) of a popup page. This command works in the same way  
as the ’Toggle Popup’ command in TPDesign4.  
Toggle a specific  
popup page on  
either a specified Syntax:  
page or the cur-  
"'@PPG-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
rent page.  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPG-Popup1;Main'"  
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the ’Main’ page from one state to another (On/Off).  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPG-Popup1'"  
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page from one state to another (On/Off).  
@PPK  
Kill refers to the deactivating (Off) of a popup window from all pages. If the pop-up page is  
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as  
the 'Clear Group' command in TPDesign 4.  
Kill a specific  
popup page from  
all pages.  
Syntax:  
"'@PPK-<popup page name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPK-Popup1'"  
Kills the popup page ’Popup1’ on all pages.  
123  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Page Commands (Cont.)  
@PPM  
A Modal popup page, when active, only allows you to use the buttons and features on that  
popup page. All other buttons on the panel page are inactivated.  
Set the modality  
of a specific  
popup page to  
Modal or  
Syntax:  
"'@PPM-<popup page name>;<mode>'"  
Variable:  
NonModal.  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
mode = NONMODAL converts a previously Modal popup page to a NonModal.  
MODAL converts a previously NonModal popup page to Modal.  
modal = 1 and non-modal = 0  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPM-Popup1;Modal'"  
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to Modal.  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPM-Popup1;1'"  
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to Modal.  
@PPN  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is  
already on, do not re-draw it. This command works in the same way as the ’Show Popup’  
command in TPDesign4.  
Activate a  
specific popup  
page to launch on Syntax:  
either a specified  
"'@PPN-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
page or the  
current page.  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPN-Popup1;Main'"  
Activates ’Popup1’ on the ’Main’ page.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPN-Popup1'"  
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.  
If timeout is empty, popup page will clear the timeout.  
Syntax:  
@PPT  
Set a specific  
popup page to  
timeout within a  
specified time.  
"'@PPT-<popup page name>;<timeout>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
timeout = Timeout duration in 1/10ths of a second.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPT-Popup1;30'"  
Sets the popup page ’Popup1’ to timeout within 3 seconds.  
@PPX  
This command works in the same way as the 'Clear All' command in TPDesign 4.  
Close all  
Syntax:  
popups on all  
pages.  
"'@PPX'"  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PPX'"  
Close all popups on all pages.  
124  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Page Commands (Cont.)  
@PSE  
Syntax:  
Set the show  
effect for the  
specified popup  
page to the  
named show  
effect.  
"'@PSE-<popup page name>;<show effect name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
show effect name = Refers to the popup effect name being used.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PSE-Popup1;Slide from Left'"  
Sets the Popup1 show effect name to ’Slide from Left’.  
@PSP  
Only 1 coordinate is ever needed for an effect; however, the command will specify both.  
This command sets the location at which the effect will begin at.  
Set the show  
effect position.  
Syntax:  
"'@PSP-<popup page name>;<x coordinate>,<y coordinate>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PSP-Popup1;100,0'"  
Sets the Popup1 show effect x-coordinate value to 100 and the y-coordinate value to 0.  
@PST  
Syntax:  
Set the show  
effect time for the  
specified popup  
page.  
"'@PST-<popup page name>;<show effect time>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed  
On.  
show effect time = Given in 1/10ths of a second.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'@PST-Popup1;50'"  
Sets the Popup1 show effect time to 5 seconds.  
PAGE  
Flips to a page with a specified page name. If the page is currently active, it will not redraw  
the page.  
Flip to a specified  
page.  
Syntax:  
"'PAGE-<page name>'"  
Variable:  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PAGE-Page1'"  
Flips to page1.  
125  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Page Commands (Cont.)  
PPOF  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is  
part of a group, the whole group is deactivated. This command works in the same way as  
the ’Hide Popup’ command in TPDesign4.  
Deactivate a  
specific popup  
page on either a  
specified page or  
the current page.  
Syntax:  
"'PPOF-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOF-Popup1;Main'"  
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOF-Popup1'"  
Deactivates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.  
PPOG  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). Toggling refers to the  
activating/deactivating (On/Off) of a popup page. This command works in the same way  
as the ’Toggle Popup’ command in TPDesign4.  
Toggle a specific  
popup page on  
either a specified Syntax:  
page or the  
"'PPOG-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
current page.  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOG-Popup1;Main'"  
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page from one state to another (On/Off).  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPOG-Popup1'"  
Toggles the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page from one state to another (On/Off).  
PPON  
If the page name is empty, the current page is used (see example 2). If the popup page is  
already On, do not re-draw it. This command works in the same way as the ’Show Popup’  
command in TPDesign4.  
Activate a  
specific popup  
page to launch on Syntax:  
either a specified  
"'PPON-<popup page name>;<page name>'"  
page or the  
current page.  
Variable:  
popup page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the popup page.  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Name of the page the popup is displayed On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPON-Popup1; Main'"  
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the Main page.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'PPON-Popup1'"  
Activates the popup page ’Popup1’ on the current page.  
126  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Programming Numbers  
The following information provides the programming numbers for colors, fonts, and borders.  
Colors can be used to set the colors on buttons, sliders, and pages. The lowest color number represents  
the lightest color-specific display; the highest number represents the darkest display.  
For example, 0 represents light red, and 5 is dark red.  
RGB triplets and names for basic 88 colors  
RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors  
Index No. Name  
Very Light Red  
Red  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
128  
112  
96  
80  
64  
48  
0
Green  
0
Blue  
0
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
Light Red  
0
0
Red  
0
0
Medium Red  
Dark Red  
0
0
0
0
Very Dark Red  
Very Light Orange  
Light Orange  
Orange  
0
0
128  
112  
96  
0
0
0
Medium Orange  
Dark Orange  
Very Dark Orange  
Very Light Yellow  
Light Yellow  
Yellow  
80  
0
64  
0
48  
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
0
Medium Yellow  
Dark Yellow  
Very Dark Yellow  
Very Light Lime  
Light Lime  
0
0
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
Lime  
0
Medium Lime  
Dark Lime  
0
0
Very Dark Lime  
Very Light Green  
Light Green  
Green  
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
0
0
0
Medium Green  
Dark Green  
Very Dark Green  
Very Light Mint  
Light Mint  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
128  
112  
96  
80  
64  
48  
0
Mint  
0
Medium Mint  
Dark Mint  
0
0
Very Dark Mint  
0
127  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Programming  
RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors (Cont.)  
Index No. Name  
Very Light Cyan  
Red  
Green  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
128  
112  
96  
80  
64  
48  
0
Blue  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
0
Light Cyan  
Cyan  
0
0
Medium Cyan  
Dark Cyan  
Very Dark Cyan  
Very Light Aqua  
Light Aqua  
Aqua  
0
0
0
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
Medium Aqua  
Dark Aqua  
Very Dark Aqua  
Very Light Blue  
Light Blue  
0
0
0
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
Blue  
0
0
Medium Blue  
Dark Blue  
0
0
0
0
Very Dark Blue  
Very Light Purple  
Light Purple  
Purple  
0
0
128  
112  
96  
80  
64  
48  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
255  
238  
204  
170  
136  
102  
187  
153  
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
Medium Purple  
Dark Purple  
Very Dark Purple  
Very Light Magenta  
Light Magenta  
Magenta  
0
0
0
0
255  
223  
191  
159  
127  
95  
0
0
Medium Magenta  
Dark Magenta  
Very Dark Magenta  
Very Light Pink  
Light Pink  
0
0
0
0
128  
112  
96  
0
Pink  
0
Medium Pink  
Dark Pink  
0
80  
0
64  
Very Dark Pink  
White  
0
48  
255  
238  
204  
170  
136  
102  
187  
153  
255  
238  
204  
170  
136  
102  
187  
153  
Grey1  
Grey3  
Grey5  
Grey7  
Grey9  
Grey4  
Grey6  
128  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
RGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors (Cont.)  
Index No. Name  
Red  
Green  
119  
85  
Blue  
119  
85  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
255  
Grey8  
119  
85  
51  
34  
221  
68  
17  
0
Grey10  
Grey12  
Grey13  
Grey2  
51  
51  
34  
34  
221  
68  
221  
68  
Grey11  
Grey14  
Black  
17  
17  
0
0
TRANSPARENT  
99  
53  
99  
Font styles and ID numbers  
Font styles can be used to program the text fonts on buttons, sliders, and pages. The following chart  
shows the default font type and their respective ID numbers generated by TPDesign4.  
Default Font Styles and ID Numbers  
Font ID # Font type  
Size  
9
Font ID # Font type  
Size  
9
1
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
Courier New  
AMX Bold  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
Arial  
2
12  
18  
26  
32  
18  
26  
34  
14  
20  
36  
Arial  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
24  
36  
10  
8
3
Arial  
4
Arial  
5
Arial  
6
Arial  
7
Arial  
8
Arial  
9
Arial  
10  
11  
AMX Bold  
Arial Bold  
Arial Bold  
AMX Bold  
32 - Variable Fonts start at 32.  
You must import fonts into a TPDesign4 project file. The font ID numbers are  
assigned by TPDesign4. These values are also listed in the  
Generate Programmer’s Report.  
129  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Border styles  
The TPDesign4 Touch Panel Design program has pre-set border styles that are user selectable. TPD4  
border styles can ONLY be changed by using the name.  
TPD4 Border Styles by Name  
Border styles  
None  
Border styles  
Diamond 55  
AMX Elite -L  
AMX Elite -M  
AMX Elite -S  
Bevel -L  
Diamond 65  
Diamond 75  
Double Bevel -L  
Double Bevel -M  
Bevel -M  
Double Bevel -S  
Bevel -S  
Double Line  
Circle 15  
Fuzzy  
Circle 25  
Glow-L  
Circle 35  
Help Down  
Circle 45  
Help Down Reversed  
Menu Bottom Rounded 15  
Menu Bottom Rounded 25  
Menu Bottom Rounded 35  
Menu Bottom Rounded 45  
Menu Bottom Rounded 55  
Menu Bottom Rounded 65  
Menu Bottom Rounded 75  
Menu Bottom Rounded 85  
Menu Bottom Rounded 95  
Menu Bottom Rounded 105  
Menu Bottom Rounded 115  
Menu Bottom Rounded 125  
Menu Bottom Rounded 135  
Menu Bottom Rounded 145  
Menu Bottom Rounded 155  
Menu Bottom Rounded 165  
Menu Bottom Rounded 175  
Menu Bottom Rounded 185  
Menu Bottom Rounded 195  
Menu Left Rounded 15  
Menu Left Rounded 25  
Menu Left Rounded 35  
Menu Left Rounded 45  
Menu Left Rounded 55  
Menu Left Rounded 65  
Menu Left Rounded 75  
Menu Left Rounded 85  
Menu Left Rounded 95  
Circle 55  
Circle 65  
Circle 75  
Circle 85  
Circle 95  
Circle 105  
Circle 115  
Circle 125  
Circle 135  
Circle 145  
Circle 155  
Circle 165  
Circle 175  
Circle 185  
Circle 195  
Cursor Bottom  
Cursor Bottom with Hole  
Cursor Top  
Cursor Top with Hole  
Cursor Left  
Cursor Left with Hole  
Cursor Right  
Cursor Right with Hole  
Custom Frame  
Diamond 15  
Diamond 25  
Diamond 35  
Diamond 45  
130  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
TPD4 Border Styles by Name (Cont.)  
Border styles  
Border styles  
Menu Left Rounded 105  
Menu Left Rounded 115  
Menu Left Rounded 125  
Menu Left Rounded 135  
Menu Left Rounded 145  
Menu Left Rounded 155  
Menu Left Rounded 165  
Menu Left Rounded 175  
Menu Left Rounded 185  
Menu Left Rounded 195  
Menu Right Rounded 15  
Menu Right Rounded 25  
Menu Right Rounded 35  
Menu Right Rounded 45  
Menu Right Rounded 55  
Menu Right Rounded 65  
Menu Right Rounded 75  
Menu Right Rounded 85  
Menu Right Rounded 95  
Menu Right Rounded 105  
Menu Right Rounded 115  
Menu Right Rounded 125  
Menu Right Rounded 135  
Menu Right Rounded 145  
Menu Right Rounded 155  
Menu Right Rounded 165  
Menu Right Rounded 175  
Menu Right Rounded 185  
Menu Right Rounded 195  
Menu Rounded Spacer - Vertical  
Menu Top Rounded 65  
Menu Top Rounded 75  
Menu Top Rounded 85  
Menu Top Rounded 95  
Menu Top Rounded 105  
Menu Top Rounded 115  
Menu Top Rounded 125  
Menu Top Rounded 135  
Menu Top Rounded 145  
Menu Top Rounded 155  
Menu Top Rounded 165  
Menu Top Rounded 175  
Menu Top Rounded 185  
Menu Top Rounded 195  
Neon Active -L  
Neon Active -S  
Neon Inactive -L  
Neon Inactive -S  
Oval V 30x60  
Oval V 50x100  
Oval V 75x150  
Oval V 100x200  
Oval H 60x30  
Oval H 100x50  
Oval H 150x75  
Oval H 200x100  
Picture Frame  
Quad Line  
Single Line  
Windows Style Popup  
Menu Rounded Spacer - Horizontal Window Style Popup (Status Bar)  
Menu Top Rounded 55  
131  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands  
These Button Commands are used in NetLinx Studio and are case insensitive.  
All commands that begin with "^" have the capability of assigning a variable text address range and  
button state range. A device must first be defined in the NetLinx programming language with values  
for the Device: Port : System (in all programming examples - Panel is used in place of these values).  
Variable text ranges allow you to target 1 or more variable text channels in a single  
command.  
Button State ranges allow you to target 1 or more states of a variable text button with a single  
command.  
"." Character is used for the 'through' notation, also the "&" character is used for the 'And'  
notation.  
"^" Button Commands  
^ANI  
Syntax:  
Run a button  
animation  
(in 1/10 second).  
"'^ANI-<vt addr range>,<start state>,<end state>,<time>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
start state = Beginning of button state (0= current state).  
end state = End of button state.  
time = In 1/10 second intervals.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ANI-500,1,25,100'"  
Runs a button animation at text range 500 from state 1 to state 25 for 10 second.  
^APF  
Syntax:  
Add page flip  
action to a button  
if it does not  
"'^APF-<vt addr range>,<page flip action>,<page name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
already exist.  
page flip action =  
Stan[dardPage] - Flip to standard page  
Prev[iousPage] - Flip to previous page  
Show[Popup] - Show Popup page  
Hide[Popup] - Hide Popup page  
Togg[lePopup] - Toggle popup state  
ClearG[roup] - Clear popup page group from all pages  
ClearP[age] - Clear all popup pages from a page with the  
specified page name  
ClearA[ll] - Clear all popup pages from all pages  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^APF-400,Stan,Main Page'"  
Assigns a button to a standard page flip with page name 'Main Page'.  
132  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BAT  
Syntax:  
Append  
"'^BAT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text>'"  
non-unicode text.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
new text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BAT-520,1,Enter City'"  
Appends the text 'Enter City' to the button’s OFF state.  
^BAU  
Same format as ^UNI.  
Append  
Syntax:  
unicode text.  
"'^BAU-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<unicode text>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
unicode text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters. Unicode characters must be entered in Hex  
format.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BAU-520,1,00770062'"  
Appends Unicode text '00770062' to the button’s OFF state.  
133  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BCB  
Only if the specified border color is not the same as the current color.  
Set the border  
color to the  
Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value  
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).  
specified color.  
Syntax:  
"'^BCB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
color value = Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 127 for more  
information.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCB-500.504&510,1,12'"  
Sets the Off state border color to 12 (Yellow). Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color  
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).  
Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 127.  
^BCF  
Only if the specified fill color is not the same as the current color.  
Set the fill color to Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value  
the specified  
color.  
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).  
Syntax:  
"'^BCF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
color value = Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 127 for more  
information.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,12'"  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,Yellow'"  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,#F4EC0A63''"  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCF-500.504&510.515,1,#F4EC0A'"  
Sets the Off state fill color by color number. Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color  
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).  
134  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BCT  
Only if the specified text color is not the same as the current color.  
Set the text color Note: Color can be assigned by color name (without spaces), number or R,G,B value  
to the specified  
color.  
(RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).  
Syntax:  
"'^BCT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
color value = Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 127 for more  
information.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BCT-500.504&510,1,12'"  
Sets the Off state border color to 12 (Yellow). Colors can be set by Color Numbers, Color  
name, R,G,B,alpha colors (RRGGBBAA) and R, G & B colors values (RRGGBB).  
^BDO  
Determines what order each layer of the button is drawn.  
Syntax:  
Set the button  
draw order.  
"'^BDO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<1-5><1-5><1-5><1-  
5><1-5>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
layer assignments = Fill Layer  
= 1  
Image Layer = 2  
Icon Layer = 3  
Text Layer = 4  
Border Layer = 5  
Note: The layer assignments are from bottom to top. The default draw order is 12345.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BDO-530,1&2,51432'"  
Sets the button’s variable text 530 ON/OFF state draw order (from bottom to top) to  
Border, Fill, Text, Icon, and Image.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BDO-1,0,12345'"  
Sets all states of a button back to its default drawing order.  
ONLY works on General-type buttons.  
^BFB  
Set the feedback Syntax:  
type of the button.  
"'^BFB-<vt addr range>,<feedback type>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
feedback type = (None, Channel, Invert, On (Always on), Momentary, and Blink).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BFB-500,Momentary'"  
Sets the Feedback type of the button to 'Momentary'.  
135  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BIM  
Syntax:  
Set the input  
mask for the  
specified address.  
"'^BIM-<vt addr range>,<input mask>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
input mask = Refer to theText Area Input Masking section on page 178 for character  
types.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BIM-500,AAAAAAAAAA'"  
Sets the input mask to ten ’A’ characters, that are required, to either a letter or digit  
(entry is required).  
^BLN  
The maximum number of lines to remove is 240. A value of 0 will display the incoming  
video signal unaffected. This command is used to scale non 4x3 video images into non 4x3  
video buttons.  
Set the number of  
lines removed  
equally from the  
top and bottom of  
a composite video  
signal.  
Syntax:  
"'^BLN-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<number of lines>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
number of lines = 0 - 240.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BLN-500,55'"  
Equally removes 55 lines from the top and 55 lines from the bottom of the video button.  
136  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BMC  
Note that the source is a single button state. Each state must be copied as a separate  
command. The <codes> section represents what attributes will be copied. All codes are  
2 char pairs that can be separated by comma, space, percent or just ran together.  
Button copy  
command.  
Copy attributes of Syntax:  
the source button  
"'^BMC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<source  
port>,<source address>,<source state>,<codes>'"  
to all the  
destination  
buttons.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
source port = 1 - 100  
source address = 1 - 4000  
source state = 1 - 256  
codes: BM - Picture/Bitmap  
BR - Border  
CB - Border Color  
CF - Fill Color  
CT - Text Color  
EC - Text effect color  
EF - Text effect  
FT - Font  
IC - Icon  
JB - Bitmap alignment  
JI - Icon alignment  
JT - Text alignment  
LN - Lines of video removed  
OP - Opacity  
SO - Button Sound  
TX - Text  
VI - Video slot ID  
WW - Word wrap on/off  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-425,1,1,500,1,BR'"  
or  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-425,1,1,500,1,%BR'"  
Copies the OFF state border of button with a variable text address of 500 onto the OFF  
state border of button with a variable text address of 425.  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMC-150,1,1,315,1,%BR%FT%TX%BM%IC%CF%CT'"  
Copies the OFF state border, font, Text, bitmap, icon, fill color and text color of the button  
with a variable text address of 315 onto the OFF state border, font, Text, bitmap, icon, fill  
color and text color of the button with a variable text address of 150.  
137  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BMF  
Syntax:  
Set any/all button  
parameters by  
sending  
embedded codes  
and data.  
"'^BMF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<data>'"  
Variables:  
variable text address char array = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
level range = 1 - 600 (level value is 1 - 65535).  
data:  
’%B<border style>’ = Set the border style name. See theTPD4 Border Styles by  
Name table on page 130.  
’%B’,<border 0-27,40,41> = Set the borer style number. See theTPD4 Border Styles by  
Name table on page 130.  
’%DO<1-5><1-5><1-5><1-5><1-5> = Set the draw order. Listed from bottom to top.  
Refer to the ^BDO command on page 135 for more information.  
’%F’,<font 1-8,10,11,20-29,32-xx> = Set the font. See theDefault Font Styles and ID  
Numbers table on page 129.  
’%F<font 01-08,10,11,20-29,32-xx>’ = Set the font. See theDefault Font Styles and ID  
Numbers table on page 129.  
’%MI<mask image>’ = Set the mask image. Refer to the ^BMI command on page 140 for  
more information.  
’%T<text >’ = Set the text using ASCII characters (empty is clear).  
’%P<bitmap>’ = Set the picture/bitmap filename (empty is clear).  
’%I’,<icon 01-9900, 0-clear>’ = Set the icon using values of 01 - 9900 (icon numbers are  
assigned in the TPDesign4 Resource Manager tab - Slots section).  
’%I<icon 01-9900, 0-clear>’ = Set the icon using values of 01 - 9900 (icon numbers are  
assigned in the TPDesign4 Resource Manager tab - Slots section).  
’%J’,<alignment of text 1-9> = As shown the following telephone keypad alignment chart:  
0
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
Zero can be used for an absolute position  
’%JT<alignment of text 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart,  
BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’  
’%JB<alignment of bitmap/picture 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad  
alignment chart BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’  
’%JI<alignment of icon 0-9>’ = As shown the above telephone keypad alignment chart,  
BUT the 0 (zero) is absolute and followed by ’,<left>,<top>’  
138  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BMF  
For some of these commands and values, refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic  
(Cont.)  
Colors table on page 127.  
’%CF<on fill color>’ = Set Fill Color.  
’%CB<on border color>’ = Set Border Color.  
’%CT<on text color>’ = Set Text Color.  
’%SW<1 or 0>’ = Show/hide a button.  
’%SO<sound>’ = Set the button sound.  
’%EN<1 or 0>’ = Enable/disable a button.  
’%WW<1 or 0>’ = Word wrap On/Off.  
’%GH<bargraph hi>’ = Set the bargraph upper limit.  
’%GL<bargraph low>’ = Set the bargraph lower limit.  
’%GN<bargraph slider name>’ = Set the bargraph slider name/Joystick cursor name.  
’%GC<bargraph slider color>’ = Set the bargraph slider color/Joystick cursor color.  
’%GI<bargraph invert>’ = Set the bargraph invert/noninvert or joystick coordinate  
(0,1,2,3). ^GIV section on page 146 more information.  
’%GU<bargraph ramp up>’ = Set the bargraph ramp up time in intervals of 1/10 second.  
’%GD<bargraph ramp down>’ = Set the bargraph ramp down time in 1/10 second.  
’%GG<bargraph drag increment> = Set the bargraph drag increment. Refer to the ^GDI  
command on page 146 for more information.  
’%VI<video On/Off>’ = Set the Video either On (value=1) or Off (value=0).  
’%OT<feedback type>’ = Set the Feedback (Output) Type to one of the following:  
None, Channel,Invert, On (AlwaysOn), Momentary, or Blink.  
’%SM’ = Submit a text for text area button.  
’%SF<1 or 0>’ = Set the focus for text area button.  
’%OP<0-255>’ = Set the button opacity to either Invisible (value=0) or Opaque  
(value=255).  
’%OP#<00-FF>’ = Set the button opacity to either Invisible (value=00) or Opaque  
(value=FF).  
’%UN<Unicode text>’ = Set the Unicode text. See the^UNI section on page 151 for the  
text format.  
’%LN<0-240>’ = Set the lines of video being removed. See the^BLN section on page 136  
for more information.  
’%EF<text effect name>’ = Set the text effect.  
’%EC<text effect color>’ = Set the text effect color.  
’%ML<max length>’ = Set the maximum length of a text area.  
’%MK<input mask>’ = Set the input mask of a text area.  
’%VL<0-1>’ = Log-On/Log-Off the computer control connection  
’%VN<network name>’ = Set network connection name.  
’%VP<password>’ = Set the network connection password.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMF-500,1,%B10%CFRed%CB Blue  
%CTBlack%Ptest.png'"  
Sets the button OFF state as well as the Border, Fill Color, Border Color, Text Color, and  
Bitmap.  
139  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BMI  
Mask image is used to crop a borderless button to a non-square shape. This is typically  
used with a bitmap.  
Set the button  
mask image.  
Syntax:  
"'^BMI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<mask image>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
mask image = Graphic file used.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMI-530,1&2,newMac.png'"  
Sets the button with variable text 530 ON/OFF state mask image to 'newmac.png'.  
^BML  
If this value is set to zero (0) there is no max length. The maximum length available is  
2000. This is only for a Text area input button and not for a Text area input masking button.  
Set the maximum  
length of the text  
area button.  
Syntax:  
"'^BML-<vt addr range>,<max length>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
max length = 2000 (0=no max length).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BML-500,20'"  
Sets the maximum length of the text area input button to 20 characters.  
Syntax:  
^BMP  
Assign a picture to  
those buttons with  
a defined address  
range.  
"'^BMP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<name of bitmap/  
picture>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
name of bitmap/picture = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BMP-500.504&510.515,1,bitmap.png'"  
Sets the OFF state picture for the buttons with variable text ranges of 500-504 & 510-515.  
Syntax:  
^BNC  
Clear current  
TakeNote  
annotations.  
"'^BNC-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
command value = (0= clear, 1= clear all).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNC-973,0'"  
Clears the annotation of the TakeNote button with variable text 973.  
140  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BNN  
Syntax:  
Set the TakeNote  
network name for  
the specified  
"'^BNN-<vt addr range>,<network name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
network name = Use a valid IP Address.  
Example:  
Addresses.  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNN-973,192.168.169.99'"  
Sets the TakeNote button network name to 192.168.169.99.  
Syntax:  
^BNT  
Set the TakeNote  
network port for  
the specified  
"'^BNT-<vt addr range>,<network port>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
network port = 1 - 65535.  
Example:  
Addresses.  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BNT-973,5000'"  
Sets the TakeNote button network port to 5000.  
^BOP  
The button opacity can be specified as a decimal between 0 - 255, where zero (0) is  
invisible and 255 is opaque, or as a HEX code, as used in the color commands by  
preceding the HEX code with the # sign. In this case, #00 becomes invisible and #FF  
becomes opaque. If the opacity is set to zero (0), this does not make the button inactive,  
only invisible.  
Set the button  
opacity.  
Syntax:  
"'^BOP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<button opacity>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
button opacity = 0 (invisible) - 255 (opaque).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOP-500.504&510.515,1,200'"  
Example 2:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOP-500.504&510.515,1,#C8'"  
Both examples set the opacity of the buttons with the variable text range of 500-504 and  
510-515 to 200.  
141  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BOR  
Refer to theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 130 for more  
information.  
Set a border to a  
specific border  
style associated  
with a border  
value for those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
Syntax:  
"'^BOR-<vt addr range>,<border style name or border value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
border style name = Refer to theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 130.  
border value = 0 - 41.  
Examples:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOR-500.504&510.515,10'"  
Sets the border by number (#10) to those buttons with the variable text range of 500-504  
& 510-515.  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOR-500.504&510,AMX Elite -M'"  
Sets the border by name (AMX Elite) to those buttons with the variable text range of  
500-504 & 510-515.  
The border style is available through the TPDesign4 border-style drop-down list. Refer to  
theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 130 for more information.  
^BOS  
The new Slot ID # is set only if the specified slot is not the same as the current slot  
selected. Passthru sets the passthru mode to On.  
This is an optional parameter and ONLY passes data to the PC.  
Set the video  
window slot ID #  
to the new Slot  
ID #.  
Syntax:  
"'^BOS-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<slot  
number>,<passthru>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
slot number = 0 = No Video Fill (Video Off)  
1 = Composite Video (Video Fill) (Video On)  
2 = Component RGB  
3 = Streaming Video. 1200V panels only have Slot 1 available.  
passthru = Passthru disable = 0 or Passthru enable = 2.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BOS-500,1,1'"  
Sets the button to display Composite video with no pass-thru.  
tion on the slot assignments within a panel.  
^BPP  
Zero clears the flag.  
Set or clear the  
protected page flip  
flag of a  
Syntax:  
"'^BPP-<vt addr range>,<protected page flip flag value>'"  
Variable:  
button.  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
protected page flip flag value range = 0 - 4 (0 clears the flag).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BPP-500,1'"  
Sets the button to protected page flip flag 1 (sets it to password 1).  
142  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BRD  
Only if the specified border is not the same as the current border. The border names are  
available through the TPDesign4 border-name drop-down list.  
Set the border of  
a button state/  
states.  
Syntax:  
"'^BRD-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<border name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
border name = Refer toTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 130.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BRD-500.504&510.515,1&2,Quad Line'"  
Sets the border by name (Quad Line) to those buttons with the variable text range of  
500-504 & 510-515.  
Refer to theTPD4 Border Styles by Name table on page 130.  
^BSF  
Note: Select one button at a time (single variable text address). Do not assign a variable  
text address range to set focus to multiple buttons. Only one variable text address can be  
in focus at a time.  
Set the focus to  
the text area.  
Syntax:  
"'^BSF-<vt addr range>,<selection value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
selection value = Unselect = 0 and select = 1.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSF-500,1'"  
Sets the focus to the text area of the button.  
^BSM  
This command causes the text areas to send their text as strings to the NetLinx Master.  
Submit text for  
Syntax:  
text area buttons.  
"'^BSM-<vt addr range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSM-500'"  
Submits the text of the text area button.  
^BSO  
If the sound name is blank the sound is then cleared. If the sound name is not matched,  
the button sound is not changed.  
Set the sound  
played when a  
button is pressed.  
Syntax:  
"'^BSO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<sound name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
sound name = (blank - sound cleared, not matched - button sound not changed).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BSO-500,1&2,music.wav'"  
Assigns the sound 'music.wav' to the button Off/On states.  
143  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^BVL  
Syntax:  
Log-On/Log-Off  
the computer  
control  
"'^BVL-<vt addr range>,<connection>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
connection = 0 (Log-Off connection) and 1 (Log-On connection).  
Example:  
connection.  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVL-500,0'"  
Logs-off the computer control connection of the button.  
Syntax:  
^BVN  
Set the computer  
control remote  
host for the  
SEND_COMMAND <DEV>,"'^BVN-<vt addr range>,<remote host>'"  
Variables:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
remote host = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
specified address.  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVN-500,191.191.191.191'"  
Sets the remote host to '191.191.191.191' for the specific computer control button.  
Syntax:  
^BVP  
Set the network  
password for the  
specified address.  
"'^BVP-<vt addr range>,<network password>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
network password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVP-500,PCLOCK'"  
Sets the password to PCLOCK for the specific PC control button.  
Syntax:  
^BVT  
Set the computer  
control network  
port for the  
"'^BVT-<vt addr range>,<network port>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
network port = 1 - 65535.  
Example:  
specified address.  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BVT-500,5000'"  
Sets the network port to 5000.  
^BWW  
By default, word-wrap is Off.  
Set the button  
word wrap  
Syntax:  
"'^BWW-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<word wrap>'"  
feature to those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
word wrap = (0=Off and 1=On). Default is Off.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BWW-500,1,1'"  
Sets the word wrap on for the button’s Off state.  
144  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^CPF  
Syntax:  
Clear all page flips  
from a button.  
"'^CPF-<vt addr range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^CPF-500'"  
Clears all page flips from the button.  
Syntax:  
^DPF  
Delete page flips  
from button if it  
already exists.  
"'^DFP-<vt addr range>,<actions>,<page name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
actions =  
Stan[dardPage] - Flip to standard page  
Prev[iousPage] - Flip to previous page  
Show[Popup] - Show Popup page  
Hide[Popup] - Hide Popup page  
Togg[lePopup] - Toggle popup state  
ClearG[roup] - Clear popup page group from all pages  
ClearP[age] - Clear all popup pages from a page with the  
specified page name  
ClearA[ll] - Clear all popup pages from all pages  
page name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^DPF-409,Prev'"  
Deletes the assignment of a button from flipping to a previous page.  
Syntax:  
^ENA  
Enable or  
disable buttons  
with a set  
variable text  
range.  
"'^ENA-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
command value = (0= disable, 1= enable)  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ENA-500.504&510.515,0'"  
Disables button pushes on buttons with variable text range 500-504 & 510-515.  
^FON  
Font ID numbers are generated by the TPDesign4 programmers report.  
Set a font to a  
specific Font ID  
value for those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
Syntax:  
"'^FON-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<font value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
font value = range = 1 - XXX. Refer to theDefault Font Styles and ID Numbers table on  
page 129.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^FON-500.504&510.515,1&2,4'"  
Sets the font size to font ID #4 for the On and Off states of buttons with the variable text  
range of 500-504 & 510-515.  
The Font ID is generated by TPD4 and is located in TPD4 through the Main menu.  
Panel > Generate Programmer's Report >Text Only Format >Readme.txt.  
145  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^GDI  
Syntax:  
Change the  
bargraph drag  
increment.  
"'^GDI-<vt addr range>,<bargraph drag increment>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph drag increment = The default drag increment is 256.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GDI-7,128'"  
Sets the bargraph with variable text 7 to a drag increment of 128.  
^GIV  
Parameters 1,2, and 3 will cause a bargraph or slider to be inverted regardless of  
orientation. Their effect will be as described for joysticks.  
Invert the  
joystick axis to  
move the origin to  
another corner.  
Syntax:  
"'^GIV-<vt addr range>,<joystick axis to invert>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
joystick axis to invert = 0 - 3.  
0 = Normal  
0
2
1
3
1 = Invert horizontal axis  
2 = Invert vertical axis  
3 = Invert both axis locations  
For a bargraph 1 = Invert , 0 = Non Invert  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GIV-500,3'"  
Inverts the joystick axis origin to the bottom right corner.  
Syntax:  
^GLH  
Change the  
bargraph upper  
limit.  
"'^GLH-<vt addr range>,<bargraph hi>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph limit range = 1 - 65535 (bargraph upper limit range).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GLH-500,1000'"  
Changes the bargraph upper limit to 1000.  
Syntax:  
^GLL  
Change the  
bargraph lower  
limit.  
"'^GLL-<vt addr range>,<bargraph low>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph limit range = 1 - 65535 (bargraph lower limit range).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GLL-500,150'"  
Changes the bargraph lower limit to 150.  
146  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^GRD  
Syntax:  
Change the  
bargraph  
ramp-down time  
in 1/10th of a  
second.  
"'^GRD-<vt addr range>,<bargraph ramp down time>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph ramp down time = In 1/10th of a second intervals.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GRD-500,200'"  
Changes the bargraph ramp down time to 20 seconds.  
Syntax:  
^GRU  
Change the  
bargraph  
ramp-up time in  
1/10th of a  
second.  
"'^GRU-<vt addr range>,<bargraph ramp up time>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph ramp up time = In 1/10th of a second intervals.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GRU-500,100'"  
Changes the bargraph ramp up time to 10 seconds.  
^GSC  
A user can also assign the color by Name and R,G,B value (RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).  
Change the  
Syntax:  
bargraph slider  
color or joystick  
cursor color.  
"'^GSC-<vt addr range>,<color value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
color value = Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 127.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GSC-500,12'"  
Changes the bargraph or joystick slider color to Yellow.  
^GSN  
Slider names and cursor names can be found in the TPDesign4 slider name and cursor  
drop-down list.  
Change the  
bargraph slider  
name or joystick  
cursor name.  
Syntax:  
"'^GSN-<vt addr range>,<bargraph slider name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
bargraph slider name = See table below.  
Bargraph Slider Names:  
None  
Circle -L  
Ball  
Precision  
Circle -S  
Circle -M  
Rectangle -L  
Windows  
Rectangle -S  
Rectangle -M  
Windows Active  
Joystick Cursor Names:  
None  
Circle  
Hand  
Target  
Ball  
Arrow  
Crosshairs  
Gunsight  
Spiral  
Metal  
View Finder  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^GSN-500,Ball'"  
Changes the bargraph slider name or the Joystick cursor name to ’Ball’.  
147  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^ICO  
Syntax:  
Set the icon to a  
button.  
"'^ICO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<icon index>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
icon index range = 0 - 9900 (a value of 0 is clear).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^ICO-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"  
Sets the icon for On and Off states for buttons with variable text ranges of 500-504 &  
510-515.  
^JSB  
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative  
to the upper left corner of the button.  
Set bitmap/  
picture alignment Syntax:  
using a numeric  
"'^JSB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text  
alignment>'"  
keypad layout for  
those buttons with  
a defined address  
range.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
new text alignment = Value of 1 - 9 corresponds to the following locations:  
0
1
4
7
3
6
9
2
5
8
Zero can be used for an absolute position  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JSB-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"  
Sets the off/on state picture alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable  
text ranges of 500-504 & 510-515.  
^JSI  
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative  
to the upper left corner of the button.  
Set icon  
alignment using a Syntax:  
numeric keypad  
"'^JSI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new icon  
alignment>'"  
layout for those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
new icon alignment = Value of 1 - 9 corresponds to the following locations:  
0
1
4
7
3
6
9
2
5
8
Zero can be used for an absolute position  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JSI-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"  
Sets the Off/On state icon alignment to upper left corner for those buttons with variable  
text range of 500-504 & 510-515.  
148  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^JST  
The alignment of 0 is followed by ',<left>,<top>'. The left and top coordinates are relative  
to the upper left corner of the button.  
Set text  
alignment using a Syntax:  
numeric keypad  
"'^JST-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text  
alignment>'"  
layout for those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
new text alignment = Value of 1 - 9 corresponds to the following locations:  
0
1
4
7
3
6
9
2
5
8
Zero can be used for an absolute position  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^JST-500.504&510.515,1&2,1'"  
Sets the text alignment to the upper left corner for those buttons with variable text ranges  
of 500-504 & 510-515.  
^MBT  
Syntax:  
Set the Mouse  
"'^MBT-<pass data>'"  
Button mode On  
for the virtual PC.  
Variable:  
pass data:  
0 = None  
1 = Left  
2 = Right  
3 = Middle  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^MBT-1'"  
Sets the mouse button mode to ’Left Mouse Click’.  
^MDC  
Syntax:  
Turn On the  
’Mouse  
double-click’  
feature for the  
virtual PC.  
"'^MDC'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^MDC'"  
Sets the mouse double-click for use with the virtual PC.  
Syntax:  
^SHO  
Show or hide a  
button with a set  
variable text  
range.  
"'^SHO-<vt addr range>,<command value>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
command value = (0= hide, 1= show).  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^SHO-500.504&510.515,0'"  
Hides buttons with variable text address range 500-504 & 510-515.  
149  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^TEC  
The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4. You can also assign the  
color by name or RGB value (RRGGBB or RRGGBBAA).  
Set the text effect  
color for the  
specified  
Syntax:  
"'^TEC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<color value>'"  
addresses/states  
to the specified  
color.  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
color value = Refer to theRGB Values for all 88 Basic Colors table on page 127.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TEC-500.504&510.515,1&2,12'"  
Sets the text effect color to Very Light Yellow on buttons with variable text 500-504  
and 510-515.  
^TEF  
The Text Effect is specified by name and can be found in TPD4.  
Set the text effect. Syntax:  
"'^TEF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<text effect name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
text effect name = Refer to theText Effects table on page 152 for a listing of text  
effect names.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TEF-500.504&510.515,1&2,Soft Drop Shadow  
3'"  
Sets the text effect to Soft Drop Shadow 3 for the button with variable text range 500-504  
and 510-515.  
^TXT  
Sets Non-Unicode text.  
Assign a text  
string to those  
buttons with a  
defined address  
range.  
Syntax:  
"'^TXT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<new text>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
new text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^TXT-500.504&510.515,1&2,Test Only'"  
Sets the On and Off state text for buttons with the variable text ranges of  
500-504 & 510-515.  
150  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
"^" Button Commands (Cont.)  
^UNI  
For the ^UNI command (%UN and ^BMF command), the Unicode text is sent as  
ASCII-HEX nibbles.  
Set Unicode text.  
Syntax:  
"'^UNI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<unicode text>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
unicode text = Unicode HEX value.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^UNI-500,1,0041'"  
Sets the button’s unicode character to ’A’.  
Note: To send the variable text ’A’ in unicode to all states of the variable text  
button 1, (for which the character code is 0041 Hex), send the following command:  
SEND_COMMAND TP,"'^UNI-1,0,0041'"  
Note: Unicode is always represented in a HEX value. TPD4 generates (through the Text  
Enter Box dialog) unicode HEX values. Refer to the TPDesign4 Instruction Manual for  
more information.  
151  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Text Effect Names  
The following is a listing of text effects names. This list is associated with the ^TEF command on  
page 150.  
Text Effects  
• Glow -S  
• Hard Drop Shadow 6  
• Glow -M  
• Hard Drop Shadow 7  
• Glow -L  
• Hard Drop Shadow 8  
• Glow -X  
• Soft Drop Shadow 1 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 2 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 3 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 4 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 5 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 6 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 7 with outline  
• Soft Drop Shadow 8 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 1 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 2 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 3 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 4 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 5 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 6 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 7 with outline  
• Medium Drop Shadow 8 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 1 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 2 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 3 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 4 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 5 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 6 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 7 with outline  
• Hard Drop Shadow 8 with outline  
• Outline -S  
• Outline -M  
• Outline -L  
• Outline -X  
• Soft Drop Shadow 1  
• Soft Drop Shadow 2  
• Soft Drop Shadow 3  
• Soft Drop Shadow 4  
• Soft Drop Shadow 5  
• Soft Drop Shadow 6  
• Soft Drop Shadow 7  
• Soft Drop Shadow 8  
• Medium Drop Shadow 1  
• Medium Drop Shadow 2  
• Medium Drop Shadow 3  
• Medium Drop Shadow 4  
• Medium Drop Shadow 5  
• Medium Drop Shadow 6  
• Medium Drop Shadow 7  
• Medium Drop Shadow 8  
• Hard Drop Shadow 1  
• Hard Drop Shadow 2  
• Hard Drop Shadow 3  
• Hard Drop Shadow 4  
• Hard Drop Shadow 5  
152  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Button Query Commands  
Button Query commands reply back with a custom event. There will be one custom event for each  
button/state combination. Each query is assigned a unique custom event type. The following example is  
for debug purposes only:  
NetLinx Example: CUSTOM_EVENT[device, Address, Custom event type]  
DEFINE_EVENT  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1001]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1002]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1003]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1004]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1005]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1006]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1007]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1008]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1009]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1010]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1011]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1012]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1013]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1014]  
CUSTOM_EVENT[TP,529,1015]  
// Text  
// Bitmap  
// Icon  
// Text Justification  
// Bitmap Justification  
// Icon Justification  
// Font  
// Text Effect Name  
// Text Effect Color  
// Word Wrap  
// ON state Border Color  
// ON state Fill Color  
// ON state Text Color  
// Border Name  
// Opacity  
{
Send_String 0,"'ButtonGet Id=',ITOA(CUSTOM.ID),' Type=',ITOA(CUSTOM.TYPE)"  
Send_String 0,"'Flag =',ITOA(CUSTOM.FLAG)"  
Send_String 0,"'VALUE1 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE1)"  
Send_String 0,"'VALUE2 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE2)"  
Send_String 0,"'VALUE3 =',ITOA(CUSTOM.VALUE3)"  
Send_String 0,"'TEXT  
=',CUSTOM.TEXT"  
Send_String 0,"'TEXT LENGTH =',ITOA(LENGTH_STRING(CUSTOM.TEXT))"  
}
153  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
All custom events have the following 6 fields:  
Custom Event Fields  
Field  
Description  
Uint Flag  
0 means text is a standard string, 1 means Unicode encoded string  
button state number  
slong value1  
slong value2  
slong value3  
string text  
actual length of string (this is not encoded size)  
index of first character (usually 1 or same as optional index  
the text from the button  
text length (string encode)  
button text length  
These fields are populated differently for each query command. The text length (String Encode) field is  
not used in any command.  
Button Query Commands  
?BCB  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
border color.  
"'?BCB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1011:  
Flag - zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)  
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCB-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' border color. information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1011  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 9  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = #222222FF  
TEXT LENGTH = 9  
154  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?BCF  
Syntax:  
Get the current fill  
color.  
"'?BCF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1012:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)  
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCF-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' fill color information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1012  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 9  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = #FF8000FF  
TEXT LENGTH = 9  
?BCT  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
text color.  
"'?BCT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1013:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)  
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BCT-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' text color information.  
The result sent to Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1013  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 9  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = #FFFFFEFF  
TEXT LENGTH = 9  
155  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?BMP  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
bitmap name.  
"'?BMP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1002:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - String that represents the bitmap name  
Text length - Bitmap name text length (should be 9)  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BMP-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' bitmap information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1002  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 9  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = Buggs.png  
TEXT LENGTH = 9  
?BOP  
Syntax:  
Get the overall  
button opacity.  
"'?BOP-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1015:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Opacity  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BOP-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' opacity information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1015  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 200  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
156  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?BRD  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
border name.  
"'?BRD-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1014:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - String that represents border name  
Text length - Border name length  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BRD-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' border information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1014  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 22  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = Double Bevel Raised -L  
TEXT LENGTH = 22  
?BWW  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
word wrap flag  
status.  
"'?BWW-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1010:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - 0 = no word wrap, 1 = word wrap  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?BWW-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' word wrap flag status information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1010  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 1  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
157  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?FON  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
font index.  
"'?FON-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1007:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Font index  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?FON-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' font type index information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1007  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 72  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
Syntax:  
=
?ICO  
Get the current  
icon index.  
"'?ICO-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1003:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Icon Index  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?ICO-529,1&2'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' icon index information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1003  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 2  
VALUE2 = 12  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
158  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?JSB  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
bitmap  
justification.  
"'?JSB-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1005:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JSB-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' bitmap justification information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1005  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 5  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
Syntax:  
=
?JSI  
Get the current  
icon  
justification.  
"'?JSI-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1006:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JSI-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' icon justification information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1006  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 6  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
=
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
159  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?JST  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
text  
justification.  
"'?JST-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1004:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - 1 - 9 justify  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Blank  
Text length - Zero  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?JST-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' text justification information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1004  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 1  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT  
TEXT LENGTH = 0  
Syntax:  
=
?TEC  
Get the current  
text effect color.  
"'?TEC-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1009:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string (should be 9)  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - Hex encoded color value (ex: #000000FF)  
Text length - Color name length (should be 9)  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TEC-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' text effect color information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1009  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 9  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = #5088F2AE  
TEXT LENGTH = 9  
160  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Button Query Commands (Cont.)  
?TEF  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
text effect name.  
"'?TEF-<vt addr range>,<button states range>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
custom event type 1008:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string  
Value3 - Zero  
Text - String that represents the text effect name  
Text length - Text effect name length  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TEF-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' text effect name information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1008  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 18  
VALUE3 = 0  
TEXT = Hard Drop Shadow 3  
TEXT LENGTH = 18  
?TXT  
Syntax:  
Get the current  
text information.  
"'?TXT-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<optional index>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
optional index = This is used if a string was too long to get back in one command.  
The reply will start at this index.  
custom event type 1001:  
Flag - Zero  
Value1 - Button state number  
Value2 - Actual length of string  
Value3 - Index  
Text - Text from the button  
Text length - Button text length  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'?TXT-529,1'"  
Gets the button 'OFF state' text information.  
The result sent to the Master would be:  
ButtonGet Id = 529 Type = 1001  
Flag = 0  
VALUE1 = 1  
VALUE2 = 14  
VALUE3 = 1  
TEXT = This is a test  
TEXT LENGTH = 14  
161  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Panel Runtime Operations  
Serial Commands are used in the AxcessX Terminal Emulator mode. These commands are case  
insensitive.  
Panel Runtime Operation Commands  
ABEEP  
Syntax:  
Output a single  
beep even if beep  
is Off.  
"'ABEEP'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'ABEEP'"  
Outputs a beep of duration 1 beep even if beep is Off.  
Syntax:  
ADBEEP  
Output a double  
beep even if beep  
is Off.  
"'ADBEEP'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'ADBEEP'"  
Outputs a double beep even if beep is Off.  
@AKB  
Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost. The Prompt  
Text is optional.  
Pop up the  
keyboard icon and Syntax:  
initialize the text  
"'@AKB-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"  
string to that  
specified.  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKB-Texas;Enter State'"  
Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string 'Texas' with prompt text 'Enter State'.  
Keyboard string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost.  
Syntax:  
AKEYB  
Pop up the  
keyboard icon and  
initialize the text  
string to that  
specified.  
"'AKEYB-<initial text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEYB-This is a Test'"  
Pops up the Keyboard and initializes the text string 'This is a Test'.  
The keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost.  
Syntax:  
AKEYP  
Pop up the  
keypad icon and  
initialize the text  
string to that  
specified.  
"'AKEYP-<number string>'"  
Variables:  
number string = 0 - 9999.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEP-12345'"  
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '12345'.  
AKEYR  
Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using 'AKEYB', 'AKEYP', 'PKEYP',  
@AKB, @AKP, @PKP, @EKP, or @TKP commands.  
Remove the  
Keyboard/  
Keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'AKEYR'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'AKEYR'"  
Removes the Keyboard/Keypad.  
162  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)  
@AKP  
Keypad string is set to null on power up and is stored until power is lost. The Prompt Text  
is optional.  
Pop up the  
keypad icon and  
initialize the text  
string to that  
specified.  
Syntax:  
"'@AKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKP-12345678;ENTER PASSWORD'"  
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '12345678' with prompt text ’ENTER  
PASSWORD’.  
@AKR  
Remove keyboard or keypad that was displayed using 'AKEYB', 'AKEYP', 'PKEYP',  
@AKB, @AKP, @PKP, @EKP, or @TKP commands.  
Remove the  
Keyboard/  
Keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'@AKR'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@AKR'"  
Removes the Keyboard/Keypad.  
Syntax:  
BEEP  
Output a beep.  
"'BEEP'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'BEEP'"  
Outputs a beep.  
BRIT  
Syntax:  
Set the panel  
brightness.  
"'BRIT-<brightness level>'"  
Variable:  
brightness level = 0 - 100.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'BRIT-50'"  
Sets the brightness level to 50.  
Syntax:  
@BRT  
Set the panel  
brightness.  
"'@BRT-<brightness level>'"  
Variable:  
brightness level = 0 - 100.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@BRT-70'"  
Sets the brightness level to 70.  
Syntax:  
DBEEP  
Output a  
"'DBEEP'"  
double beep.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'DBEEP'"  
Outputs a double beep.  
163  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)  
@EKP  
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. The Prompt Text is  
optional.  
Extend the  
Keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'@EKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@EKP-33333333;Enter Password'"  
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '33333333' with prompt text 'Enter  
Password'.  
PKEYP  
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. Keypad displays a  
'*' instead of the numbers typed. The Prompt Text is optional.  
Present a private  
keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'PKEYP-<initial text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'PKEYP-123456789'"  
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string '123456789' in '*'.  
@PKP  
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. Keypad displays a  
'*' instead of the numbers typed. The Prompt Text is optional.  
Present a private  
keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'@PKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@PKP-1234567;ENTER PASSWORD'"  
Pops up the Keypad and initializes the text string 'ENTER PASSWORD' in '*'.  
SETUP  
Syntax:  
Send panel to  
SETUP page.  
"'SETUP'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SETUP'"  
Sends the panel to the Setup Page.  
Syntax:  
SHUTDOWN  
Shut down the  
batteriesproviding  
power to the  
panel.  
"'SHUTDOWN'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SHUTDOWN'"  
Shuts-down the batteries feeding power to the panel. This function saves the battery from  
discharging.  
SLEEP  
Syntax:  
Force the panel  
into screen saver  
mode.  
"'SLEEP'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'SLEEP'"  
Forces the panel into screen saver mode.  
164  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Panel Runtime Operation Commands (Cont.)  
@SOU  
Syntax:  
Play a sound file.  
"'@SOU-<sound name>'"  
Variables:  
sound name = Name of the sound file. Supported sound file formats  
are: WAV & MP3.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@SOU-Music.wav'"  
Plays the 'Music.wav' file.  
@TKP  
Pops up the keypad icon and initializes the text string to that specified. The Prompt Text is  
optional.  
Present a  
telephone  
keypad.  
Syntax:  
"'@TKP-<initial text>;<prompt text>'"  
Variables:  
initial text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
prompt text = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@TKP-999.222.1211;Enter Phone Number'"  
Pops-up the Keypad and initializes the text string '999.222.1211' with prompt text 'Enter  
Phone Number'.  
TPAGEON  
This command turns On page tracking, whereby when the page or popups change, a  
string is sent to the Master. This string may be captured with a CREATE_BUFFER  
command for one panel and sent directly to another panel.  
Turn On page  
tracking.  
Syntax:  
"'TPAGEON'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'TPAGEON'"  
Turns On page tracking.  
Syntax:  
TPAGEOFF  
Turn Off page  
tracking.  
"'TPAGEOFF'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'TPAGEOFF'"  
Turns Off page tracking.  
Syntax:  
@VKB  
Popup the  
virtual  
keyboard.  
"'@VKB'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@VKB'"  
Pops-up the virtual keyboard.  
Syntax:  
WAKE  
Force the panel  
out of screen  
saver mode.  
"'WAKE'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'WAKE'"  
Forces the panel out of the screen saver mode.  
165  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Input Commands  
These Send Commands are case insensitive.  
Input Commands  
^CAL  
Syntax:  
Put panel in  
"'^CAL'"  
calibration mode.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^CAL'"  
Puts the panel in calibration mode.  
Syntax:  
^KPS  
Set the  
"'^KPS-<pass data>'"  
keyboard  
passthru.  
Variables:  
pass data:  
<blank/empty> = Disables the keyboard.  
0 = Pass data to G4 application (default). This can be used with VPC or text areas.  
1 - 4 = Not used.  
5 = Sends out data to the Master.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^KPS-5'"  
Sets the keyboard passthru to the Master. Option 5 sends keystrokes directly to the  
Master via the Send Output String mechanism. This process sends a virtual keystroke  
command (^VKS) to the Master.  
Example 2:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^KPS-0'"  
Disables the keyboard passthru to the Master.  
The following point defines how the parameters within this command work:  
• Accepts keystrokes from any of these sources: attached USB keyboard or Virtual  
keyboard.  
166  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Input Commands (Cont.)  
^SLT  
These commands are directed at the video card subsystems. Slot commands contain a  
series of name/value pairs separated by commas. These commands are case insensitive.  
Syntax:  
Send a  
command to a  
given slot.  
"’^SLT-<slot number>,<slot command>’"  
Variables:  
slot number = 1 - 3 (each of these options corresponds to an on-board slot  
position where the related components reside.)  
Slot 1= Composite Video (common to both 1200-V and VG-Series)  
Slot 2 = RGB Component Video (only available on the VG-Series)  
Slot 3 = Streaming MPEG Video (only available on the VG-Series)  
slot command = see list below:  
Interlace = <0 or 1> where:  
0 = Deselects Interlace and 1 = Selects Interlace  
Sharpness = < 0 or 1> where:  
0 = Disables Sharpness and 1 = Enables Sharpness  
SyncOn Green = < 0 or 1> where  
0 = Disables SyncOnGreen and 1= Enables SyncOnGreen  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND TP,"’^SLT-1,Interlace=1’"  
Enables Interlace on the incoming Composite video signal.  
SEND_COMMAND TP,"’^SLT-3,Sharpness=1’"  
Enables sharpness on the incoming MPEG video stream (if available).  
SEND_COMMAND TP,"’^SLT-2,SyncOnGreen=1’"  
Enables the SynOnGreen feature for the incoming RGB signal (if available).  
^VKS  
Key presses and key releases are not distinguished except in the case of CTRL, ALT, and  
SHIFT.  
Send one or more  
virtual keystrokes Refer to the Embedded Codes table on page 168 that define special characters which  
to the G4  
can be included with the string but may not be represented by the ASCII character set.  
application.  
Syntax:  
"'^VKS-<string>'"  
Variable:  
string = Only 1 string per command/only one stroke per command.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^VKS-'8"  
Sends out the keystroke 'backspace' to the G4 application.  
167  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
Embedded Codes  
The following is a list of G4 compatible embedded codes:  
Embedded Codes  
Decimal numbers Hexidecimal values  
Virtual keystroke  
8
($08)  
($0D)  
($1B)  
($80)  
($81)  
($82)  
($83)  
($84)  
($85)  
($86)  
($87)  
($88)  
($89)  
($8A)  
($8B)  
($8C)  
($8D)  
($8E)  
($8F)  
($90)  
($91)  
($92)  
($93)  
($94)  
($95)  
($96)  
($97)  
($98)  
($99)  
($9A)  
($9B)  
($9C)  
($9D)  
($9E)  
($9F)  
($A0)  
($A1)  
($A2)  
($C0)  
($C1)  
($C2)  
Backspace  
Enter  
13  
27  
ESC  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
192  
193  
194  
CTRL key down  
ALT key down  
Shift key down  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
F7  
F8  
F9  
F10  
F11  
F12  
Num Lock  
Caps Lock  
Insert  
Delete  
Home  
End  
Page Up  
Page Down  
Scroll Lock  
Pause  
Break  
Print Screen  
SYSRQ  
Tab  
Windows  
Menu  
Up Arrow  
Down Arrow  
Left Arrow  
Right Arrow  
CTRL key up  
ALT key up  
Shift key up  
168  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Panel Setup Commands  
These commands are case insensitive.  
Panel Setup Commands  
^MUT  
Syntax:  
Set the panel  
mute state.  
"'^MUT-<mute state>'"  
Variable:  
mute state= 0 = Mute Off and 1 = Mute On.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^MUT-1''"  
Sets the panel’s master volume to mute.  
@PWD sets the level 1 password only.  
Syntax:  
@PWD  
Set the page flip  
password.  
"'@PWD-<page flip password>'"  
Variables:  
page flip password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@PWD-Main'"  
Sets the page flip password to 'Main'.  
Password level is required and must be 1 - 4.  
Syntax:  
^PWD  
Set the page flip  
password.  
"'^PWD-<password level>,<page flip password>'"  
Variables:  
password level = 1 - 4.  
page flip password = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'^PWD-1,Main'"  
Sets the page flip password on Password Level 1 to 'Main'.  
@RPP resets the protected password to its default (1988).  
Syntax:  
@RPP  
Reset the  
protected  
password.  
"'@RPP'"  
Example:  
SEND COMMAND Panel,"'@RPP'"  
Resets the protected Setup page password to ‘1988’.  
Syntax:  
^VOL  
Set the panel  
volume.  
"'^VOL-<volume level>'"  
Variable:  
volume level = 0 - 100. 100 is maximum volume setting.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^VOL-50'"  
Set the panel volume to 50.  
169  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Dynamic Image Commands  
The following is a listing and descriptions of Dynamic Image Commands.  
Dynamic Image Commands  
^BBR  
Syntax:  
Set the bitmap of  
a button to use a  
particular  
"'^BBR-<vt addr range>,<button states range>,<resource name>'"  
Variable:  
variable text address range = 1 - 4000.  
resource.  
button states range = 1 - 256 for multi-state buttons (0 = All states, for General buttons  
1 = Off state and 2 = On state).  
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^BBR-700,1,Sports_Image'"  
Sets the resource name of the button to ’Sports_Image’.  
See page 171.  
^RAF  
^RFR  
Syntax:  
Force a refresh for  
a given resource.  
"'^RFR-<resource name>'"  
Variable:  
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RFR-Sports_Image'"  
Forces a refresh on ’Sports_Image’.  
Syntax:  
^RMF  
Modify an  
"'^RMF-<resource name>,<data>'"  
existing resource.  
Variable:  
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters  
data = Refer to the table in the RAF command for more information.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RMF-Sports_Image,%ALab_Test/  
Images%Ftest.jpg'"  
Changes the resource ’Sports_Image’ file name to ’test.jpg’ and the path to ’Lab_Test/  
Images’.  
^RSR  
Syntax:  
Change the  
"'^RSR-<resource name>,<refresh rate>'"  
refresh rate for a  
given resource.  
Variable:  
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
refresh rate = Measured in seconds.  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RSR-Sports_Image,5'"  
Sets the refresh rate to 5 seconds for the given resource (’Sports_Image’).  
170  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Programming  
Dynamic Image Commands (Cont.)  
^RAF  
Adds any and all resource parameters by sending embedded codes and data.  
Add new  
Syntax:  
resources.  
"'^RAF-<resource name>,<data>'"  
Variable:  
resource name = 1 - 50 ASCII characters.  
data = Refers to the embedded codes, see table below.  
Embedded Codes:  
Parameter  
Description  
Embedded Code  
’%P<0-1>’  
Set protocol. HTTP (0) or FTP (1).  
Set Username for authentication.  
protocol  
user  
’%U<user>’  
password  
host  
Set Password for authentication.  
’%S<password>’  
’%H<host>’  
Set Host Name (fully qualified  
DNS or IP Address).  
file  
Full path to the location of the file or  
program that will return the resource.  
The path must be a valid HTTP URL  
minus the protocol and host. The  
only exception to this is the inclusion  
of special escape sequences and in  
the case of the FTP protocol, regular  
expressions.  
’%F<file>’  
path  
Set Directory path. The path must  
be a valid HTTP URL minus the  
protocol, host, and filename. The  
only exception to this is the  
’%A<path>’  
inclusion of special escape  
sequences and in the case of the  
FTP protocol, regular expressions.  
refresh  
The number of seconds between  
refreshes in which the resource is  
downloaded again. Refreshing a  
resource causes the button  
’%R<refresh 1-65535>’  
displaying that resource to refresh  
also. The default value is 0 (only  
download the resource once).  
Set the newest file. A value of 1  
means that only the most recent file  
matching the pattern is downloaded.  
newest  
’%N<0-1>’  
’%V<0-1>’  
Set the value of the preserve flag.  
Default is 0. Currently preserve has  
no function.  
preserve  
Example:  
SEND_COMMAND Panel,"'^RAF-New Image,%P0%HAMX.COM%ALab/  
Test_file%Ftest.jpg'"  
Adds a new resource. The resource name is ’New Image’, %P (protocol) is an HTTP, %H  
(host name) is AMX.COM, %A (file path) is Lab/Test file, and %F (file name) is test.jpg.  
171  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Programming  
172  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting  
This section describes the solutions to possible hardware/firmware issues that could arise during the  
common operation of a Modero touch panel.  
Troubleshooting Information  
Symptom  
Solution  
Manifest.xma can not be found.  
An error occurs when sending a  
file to a G4 panel.  
• Manifest.xma is the file that contains the listing for all the files. If you  
see this error again, before attempting to send the file, uncheck the  
Smart Transfer box. It may be necessary do a Full Clean.  
When using G4 WebControl to  
communicate with a target panel, a  
VNC Server dialog appears on my  
screen.  
• During a WebControl connection to a target panel you are prompted  
with a G4 Authentication dialog which asks you to enter the assigned  
password for the panel (before gaining access).  
• If you are ever prompted with a VNC Server dialog, you must enter  
the IP Address of the target panel. This can be found within the  
Setup > Protected Setup >System Settings page.  
- This IP Address of the panel appears within the IP Settings  
section of this page  
• Enter the IP Address and click OK. You will then be prompted with  
the G4 Authentication popup where you must enter the panel’s  
WebControl password.  
While attempting to communicate • A Green communication icon indicates that a connection has been  
directly with the Virtual Master (on  
the PC) via a USB connection, I  
can’t get my communication icon  
to turn Green.  
established to the target Master or target Virtual Master.  
• Launch NetLinx Studio and configure the Master Connection  
communication settings for a Virtual Master.  
• Navigate to the System Settings page and toggle the Type field to  
USB.  
• Make sure the Type-A USB connector is securely connected to the  
PC.  
• Make sure the panel DOESN’T have the mini-USB connected and  
TURN OFF the panel.  
• Once the panel has turned ON THEN connect the mini-USB to the  
Program Port. The USB icon should appear in your system tray. If it  
• The panel can take a few minutes to detect the connection to the PC.  
Calibration is not working.  
• After the Modero touch panel has been updated with a new firmware  
kit (downloaded to the panel through NetLinx Studio), the calibration  
could need to be reset.  
• Cycling power to the panel should provide a baseline calibration for  
the particular touch panel. Proceed to the Calibration page and reset  
the on-screen calibration.  
Panel doesn’t respond to my  
touches  
• The protective cover acts to press on the entire LCD and makes  
calibration difficult because the user can’t calibrate on specific  
crosshairs when the sheet is pressing on the whole LCD.  
• Verify that the protective laminate coating on the LCD is removed  
before beginning any calibration process.  
173  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Information (Cont.)  
Symptom  
Solution  
I updated my panel firmware but  
my Battery Base page doesn’t  
seem to be working properly.  
• Cycle power manually to the panel and check the Battery Base page  
after startup.  
• If downloading the firmware to the panel via a COM port, try using an  
IP Address and retry the download of the firmware to the panel.  
There is a crawling, dashed line on • On some units at some resolutions, there are wavy lines across the  
the left border of the graphics.  
entire screen. This has been seen on middle resolutions and is  
referred to as the "Mid Range Fallout" problem.  
• This is due to the graphics controller settings in the firmware.  
• Update firmware to the latest v2.XX. firmware.  
• Visit the www.amx.com > Tech Center > Downloadable Files >  
Firmware Files > Modero panels. Then Download the KIT file to  
your computer.  
My Modero panel isn’t appearing  
in my Workspace window.  
• Verify that the System number is the same on both the NetLinx  
Workspace window and the System Settings page on the Modero  
panel.  
• Verify you have entered the proper NetLinx Master IP and connection  
methods into the Master Connection section of the System Settings  
page.  
information.  
My Modero panel can’t obtain a  
DHCP Address  
In requesting a DHCP Address, the DHCP Server can take up to a few  
minutes to provide the address.  
• Verify there is an active Ethernet connection attached to the rear of  
the Modero before beginning these procedures.  
• Select Diagnostics > Network Address, from the Main menu and  
verify the System number.  
• If the IP Address field is still empty, give the Modero a few minutes to  
negotiate a DHCP Address and try again.  
My NXT-BP battery pack is  
blinking when I check the battery  
life indicator.  
• A blinking battery life LED indicates that there is less than 10% power  
charge remaining on the battery.  
• It is recommended that you fully charge the battery either in the  
NXA-BASE/B battery base or in the NXT-CHG battery charger.  
page 25 for more information.  
I was using the power from PSN,  
and when I connected my  
NXA-BASE/B battery base to the  
active panel, my screen went  
blank.  
• Modero battery bases can not be "hot-swapped" or replaced without  
powering down the Modero and removing the PSN connector.  
If you are currently using a direct power connection to the panel and  
then wish to connect an NXA-BASE/B.  
First, power-down the panel and detach the rear power connection.  
Then, remove any batteries from within the NXA-BASE/B and  
connect the battery base to the underside of the panel.  
After connecting the base to the un-powered panel, then run power  
to the panel by either reconnecting the power cable to the rear of the  
panel or inserting the NXT-BP batteries into the NXA-BASE/B.  
Panel section on page 27 for more information.  
My WEP doesn’t seem to be  
working.  
• WEP will not work unless the same default key is set on both the  
panel and the AP.  
• For example: if you had your access point set to default key 4 which  
was 01:02:03:04:05 and you set the Modero to key 1 which was also  
01:02:03:04:05 it will not work. You have to set key 4 on the Modero  
to 01:02:03:04:0.  
174  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Information (Cont.)  
Symptom  
Solution  
I can’t seem to completely charge NXT-BP batteries can be charged from either an external NXT-CHG  
my batteries from within an  
NXA-BASE/B connected to a  
power supply.  
battery charger or from within the NXA-BASE/B located below an NXT  
panel.  
• The NXA-BASE/B Battery base should be updated with the latest  
firmware (part of the Modero firmware KIT file) from www.amx.com.  
• The base can only charge batteries while the NXT panel is in Sleep  
Mode. If the panel parameters are set to their highest values, the  
priority for the power draw becomes the active panel functions and  
no power is routed to the base for charging.  
• Adjust the Display Timeout value to allow the panel to commence the  
Sleep Mode and begin charging batteries within the base (drawing  
power from a PSN).  
page 25 for more information.  
NetLinx Studio only detects one of Each Master is give a Device Address of 00000.  
my connected Masters.  
• Only one Master can be assigned to a particular System number. If  
you want to work with multiple Masters, open different instances of  
NetLinx Studio and assign each Master its own System value.  
• Example: a site has an NXC-ME260/64 and an NI-4000. In order to  
work with both units. The ME260/64 can be assigned System #1 and  
the NI-4000 can then be assigned System #2 using two open  
sessions of NetLinx Studio 2.x.  
I can’t seem to connect to a  
NetLinx Master using my  
NetLinx Studio 2.x.  
• From the Settings > Master Comm Settings > Communication  
Settings > Settings (for TCP/IP), uncheck the "Automatically Ping  
the Master Controller to ensure availability".  
• The pinging is to determine if the Master is available, and to reply  
with a connection failure instantly if it is not. Without using the ping  
feature, you will still attempt to make a connection, but a failure will  
take longer to be recognized. Some firewalls and networks do not  
allow pinging, though, and the ping will then always result in a failure.  
• When connecting to a NetLinx Master controller via TCP/IP, the  
program will first try to ping the controller before attempting a  
connection. Pinging a device is relatively fast and will determine if the  
device is off-line, or if the TCP/IP address that was entered was  
incorrect. If you decide NOT to ping for availability and the controller  
is off-line, or you have an incorrect TCP/IP address, the program will  
try for 30-45 seconds to establish a connection.  
Note: If you are trying to connect to a master controller that is behind a  
firewall, you may have to uncheck this option. Most firewalls will not  
allow ping requests to pass through for security reasons.  
I have more that one Modero panel Multiple NetLinx Compatible devices (such as Modero panels) can be  
connected to my System Master  
and only one shows up.  
associated for use with a single Master. Each Modero panel comes  
with a defaulted Device Number value of 10001. When using multiple  
panels, it can become very easy to overlook the need to assign  
different Device Number values to each panel.  
• Press and hold the grey Front Setup Access button for 3 seconds to  
open the Setup page.  
• Press the Protected Setup button (located on the lower-left of the  
panel page), enter 1988 into the on-screen Keypad’s password field,  
and press Done when finished.  
• Enter a Device Number value for the panel into the Device Number  
Keypad. The default is 10001 and the range is from 1 - 32000.  
175  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Information (Cont.)  
Symptom  
Solution  
After downloading a panel file or  
firmware to a G4 device, the panel  
behaves strangely.  
Symptoms include:  
• Having to repeat the download.  
• Inability to make further downloads to the panel. May get "directory"  
errors, "graphics hierarchy" errors, etc.… indicating problems with  
the Compact Flash.  
• Panel will not boot, or gets stuck on "AMX" splash screen.  
• Other problems also started after downloading to a new panel or a  
panel with a TPD4 file that takes up a considerable amount of the  
available Compact Flash.  
Cause:  
• If the G4 device already contains a large enough file, subsequent  
downloads will take up more space than is available and could often  
corrupt the Compact Flash. The demo file that typically ships with G4  
panels is one such file.  
Solution:  
• DO NOT download TPD4 files (of large size) over the demo pages, or  
any other large TPD4 file.  
• First download a small blank one page file to the G4 panel using the  
Normal Transfer option to send/download the page. Reboot the  
device, then do your regular file or firmware download.  
My NXA-BASE/B Battery Base  
The battery base CAN NOT be "hot swapped". This swapping  
isn’t being recognized by the NXT occurs when an NXT panel is currently being powered by a PSN6.5  
touch panel.  
and then is connected to a battery base containing NXT-BP batteries.  
Introducing a new power source onto an existing configuration can  
damage the NXA-BASE.  
Solution:  
If your base is not being recognized by the touch panel but is still  
providing power:  
• Launch the latest version of NetLinx Studio.  
• Refresh the particular System from within the OnLine Tree tab.  
• Identify the NXT panel using the battery base.  
• From the Main menu go to Tools > Firmware Transfers > Send to  
NetLinx Device.  
• Locate and select the 2250_XXX_v2 KIT file for the battery base.  
• Enter the Device and System values, verify the method of  
communication (IP recommended).  
• Click Send to reload the new base KIT file onto the NXA-BASE/B.  
If this above steps do not cause the base to be recognized by the NXT  
touch panel on the Setup page, contact AMX Technical Support for  
further assistance.  
The Battery Base button doesn’t  
appear on the panel’s Setup page.  
• Refer to the above troubleshooting symptom.  
176  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Appendix A  
Appendix A  
Text Formatting Codes for Bargraphs/Joysticks  
Text formatting codes for bargraphs provide a mechanism to allow a portion of a bargraphs text to be  
dynamically provided information about the current status of the level (multistate and traditional). These  
codes would be entered into the text field along with any other text.  
The following is a code list used for bargraphs:  
Bargraph Text Code Inputs  
Code  
Bargraph  
Multi-State Bargraph  
$P  
Display the current percentage of the  
bargraph (derived from the Adjusted  
Level Value as it falls between the  
Range Values)  
Display the current percentage of the  
bargraph (derived from the Adjusted  
Level Value as it falls between the  
Range Values)  
$V  
$L  
$H  
$S  
$A  
Raw Level Value  
Range Low Value  
Range High Value  
N/A  
Raw Level Value  
Range Low Value  
Range High Value  
Current State  
Adjusted Level Value (Range Low Value Adjusted Level Value (Range Low Value  
subtracted from the Raw Level Value)  
subtracted from the Raw Level Value)  
$R  
$$  
Low Range subtracted from the High  
Range  
Low Range subtracted from the High  
Range  
Dollar sign  
Dollar sign  
Buy changing the text on a button (via a VT command) you can modify the codes on a button. When one  
of the Text Formatting Codes is encountered by the firmware it is replaced with the correct value. These  
values are derived from the following operations:  
Formatting Code Operations  
Code  
$P  
Operation  
(Current Value - Range Low Value / Range High Value - Range Low Value) x 100  
Current Level Value  
$V  
$L  
Range Low Value  
$H  
Range High Value  
$S  
Current State (if regular bargraph then resolves to nothing)  
Current Value - Range Low Value  
Range High Value - Range Low Value  
$A  
$R  
Given a current raw level value of 532, a range low value of 500 and a high range value of 600 the  
following text formatting codes would yield the following strings as shown in the table below:  
Example  
Format  
Display  
$P%  
32%  
$A out of $R  
$A of 0 - $R  
$V of $L - $H  
32 out of 100  
32 of 0 - 100  
532 of 500 - 600  
177  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Appendix A  
Text Area Input Masking  
Text Area Input Masking can be used to limit the allowed/correct characters that are entered into a text  
area. For example, in working with a zip code, a user could limit the entry to a max length of only 5  
characters but, with input masking, you could limit them to 5 mandatory numerical digits and 4 optional  
numerical digits. A possible use for this feature is to enter information into form fields. The purpose of  
this feature is to:  
• Force you to use correct type of characters (i.e. numbers vs. characters)  
• Limit the number of characters in a text area  
• Suggest proper format with fixed characters  
• Right to Left  
• Required or Optional  
• Change/Force a Case  
• Create multiple logical fields  
• Specify range of characters/number for each field  
With this feature, it is NOT necessary to:  
• Limit you to a choice of selections  
• Handle complex input tasks such as names, days of the weeks or months by name  
• Perform complex validation such as Subnet Mask validation  
Input mask character types  
These character types define what information is allowed to be entered in any specific instance. The  
following table lists what characters in an input mask will define what characters are allowed in any  
given position.  
Character Types  
Character Masking Rule  
0
9
#
L
?
A
a
&
C
Digit (0 to 9, entry required, plus [+] and minus [-] signs not allowed)  
Digit or space (entry not required, plus and minus signs not allowed)  
Digit or space (entry not required; plus and minus signs allowed)  
Letter (A to Z, entry required)  
Letter (A to Z, entry optional)  
Letter or digit (entry required)  
Letter or digit (entry optional)  
Any character or a space (entry required)  
Any character or a space (entry optional)  
The number of the above characters used determines the length of the input masking  
box. Example: 0000 requires an entry, requires digits to be used, and allows only 4  
characters to be entered/used.  
178  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
     
Appendix A  
Refer to the following Send Commands for more detailed information:  
^BIM- Sets the input mask for the specified addresses. (see the ^BIM section on  
^BMFsubcommand %MK - sets the input mask of a text area (see the  
Input mask ranges  
These ranges allow a user to specify the minimum and maximum numeric value for a field.  
Only one range is allowed per field. Using a range implies a numeric entry ONLY.  
Input Mask Ranges  
Character Meaning  
[
]
|
Start range  
End range  
Range Separator  
An example from the above table:  
[0|255] This allows a user to enter a value from 0 to 255.  
Input mask next field characters  
These characters allow you to specify a list of characters that cause the keyboard to move the focus to the  
next field when pressed instead of inserting the text into the text area.  
Input Mask Next Field Char  
Character Meaning  
{
}
Start Next Field List  
End Next Field List  
An example from the above table:  
{.} or {:} or {.:} Tells the system that after a user hits any of these keys, proceed to the  
next text area input box.  
Input mask operations  
Input Mask Operators change the behavior of the field in the following way:  
Input Mask Operators  
Character Meaning  
<
>
^
Forces all characters to be converted to lowercase  
Forces all characters to be converted to uppercase  
Sets the overflow flag for this field  
Input mask literals  
To define a literal character, enter any character, other than those shown in the above table (including  
spaces, and symbols). A back-slash ('\') causes the character that follows it to be displayed as the literal  
character. For example, \A is displayed just as the letter A. To define one of the following characters as a  
literal character, precede that character with a back-slash. Text entry operation using Input Masks.  
179  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
       
Appendix A  
A keyboard entry using normal text entry is straightforward. However, once an input mask is applied, the  
behavior of the keyboard needs to change to accommodate the input mask's requirement. When working  
with masks, any literal characters in the mask will be "skipped" by any cursor movement including  
cursor keys, backspace, and delete.  
When operating with a mask, the mask should be displayed with placeholders. The "-" character should  
display where you should enter a character. The arrow keys will move between the "-" characters and  
allow you to replace them. The text entry code operates as if it is in the overwrite mode. If the cursor is  
positioned on a character already entered and you type in a new (and valid) character, the new character  
replace the old character. There is no shifting of characters.  
When working with ranges specified by the [] mask, the keyboard allows you to enter a number between  
the values listed in the ranges. If a user enters a value that is larger than the max, the maximum number  
of right-most characters is used to create a new, acceptable value.  
Example 1: If you type "125" into a field accepting 0-100, then the values displayed will be  
"1", "12", "25".  
Example2: If the max for the filed was 20, then the values displayed will  
be "1", "12", "5".  
When data overflows from a numerical field, the overflow value is added to the previous field on the  
chain, if the overflow character was specified. In the above example, if the overflow flag was set, the first  
example will place the "1" into the previous logical field and the second example will place "12" in the  
previous logical field. If the overflow filed already contains a value, the new value will be inserted to the  
right of the current characters and the overflow field will be evaluated. Overflow continues to work until  
a filed with no overflow value is set or there are no more fields left (i.e. reached first field).  
If a character is typed and that characters appear in the Next Field list, the keyboard should move the  
focus to the next field. For example, when entering time, a ":" is used as a next field character. If you hit  
"1:2", the 1 is entered in the current field (hours) and then the focus is moved to the next field and 2 is  
entered in that field.  
When entering time in a 12-hour format, entry of AM and PM is required. Instead of adding  
AM/PM to the input mask specification, the AM/PM should be handled within the NetLinx code. This  
allows a programmer to show/hide and provide discrete feedback for AM and PM.  
Input mask output examples  
The following are some common input masking examples:  
Output Examples  
Common Name  
IP Address Quad  
Hour  
Input Mask  
[0|255]{.}  
Input  
Any value from 0 to 255  
Any value from 1 to 12  
Any value from 0 to 59  
Any value from 0 to 29  
(555) 555-5555  
[1|12]{:}  
Minute/Second  
Frames  
[0|59]{:}  
[0|29]{:}  
Phone Numbers  
Zip Code  
(999) 000-0000  
00000-9999  
75082-4567  
180  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
 
Appendix A  
URL Resources  
A URL can be broken into several parts. For example: the URL http://www.amx.com/company-info-  
home.asp. This URL indicates that the protocol in use is http (HyperText Transport Protocol) and that  
the information resides on a host machine named www.amx.com. The image on that host machine is  
given an assignment (by the program) name of company-info-home.asp (Active Server Page).  
The exact meaning of this name on the host machine is both protocol dependent and host dependent. The  
information normally resides in a file, but it could be generated dynamically. This component of the  
URL is called the file component, even though the information is not necessarily in a file.  
A URL can optionally specify a port, which is the port number to which the TCP connection is made on  
the remote host machine. If the port is not specified, the default port for the protocol is used instead. For  
example, the default port for http is 80. An alternative port could be specified as: http://  
www.amx.com:8080/company-info-home.asp.  
Any legal HTTP syntax can be used.  
Special escape sequences  
The system has only a limited knowledge of URL formats in that it transparently passes the URL  
information onto the server for translation. A user can then pass any parameters to the server side  
programs such as CGI scripts or active server pages. However; the system will parse the URL looking  
for special escape codes. When it finds an escape code it replaces that code with a particular piece of  
panel, button, or state information.  
For example, "http://www.amx.com/img.asp?device=$DV" would become "http://www.amx.com/  
img.asp?device=10001". Other used escape sequences include:  
Escape Sequences  
Sequence  
$DV  
$SY  
$IP  
Panel Information  
Device Number  
System Number  
IP Address  
$HN  
$MC  
$ID  
Host Name  
Mac Address  
Neuron ID  
$PX  
$PY  
$BX  
$BY  
$BN  
$ST  
X Resolution of current panel mode/file  
Y Resolution of current panel mode/file  
X Resolution of current button  
Y Resolution of current button  
Name of button  
Current state  
$AC  
$AP  
$CC  
$CP  
$LC  
Address Code  
Address Port  
Channel Code  
Channel Port  
Level Code  
$LP  
Level Port  
181  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
   
Appendix A  
182  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Appendix A  
183  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Appendix A  
184  
1200V Modero Video Touch Panels  
Appendix  
185  
7" Modero Widescreen Touch Panels  
It’s Your World - Take Control™  
3000 RESEARCH DRIVE, RICHARDSON, TX 75082 USA • 800.222.0193 • 469.624.8000 • 469-624-7153 fax • 800.932.6993 technical support • www.amx.com  

HP Hewlett Packard L1740 User Manual
HP Hewlett Packard Hewlett Packard Computer Monitor VP19 User Manual
Geemarc Clearsound AmpliDECT230 User Manual
Electrolux Air O Convect AOS202ECA1 User Manual
Eizo EIZO FlexScan S2001W User Manual
Cypress CY7C1141V18 User Manual
Atlantis Land A05 19AM C08 User Manual
Asus P9X79 DELUXE P9X79DELUXE User Manual
Asus Computer Monitor VW246 User Manual
Acer Computer Monitor V203H User Manual